Chrysler Group LLC: Owner'S Manual

2015 200
2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
200
Chrysler Group LLC
15UF-126-AC Third Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or op-
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of disregard any features and equipment described in this
accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- improvements to its products without imposing any
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
portation. ously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from Vehicle Identification Number
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped under the right front seat
and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration and title.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 2
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18 ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .25 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .27 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .60
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .108
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) has four oper-
ating positions, three of which are labeled and will
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF,
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START,
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
during start RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion). the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition switch.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob. 2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System)
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
WARNING!
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime, Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. 2
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
cluster. access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the dren should be warned not to touch the parking
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this tor.
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in a location accessible to children, and do not
information. leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
WARNING! (Continued)
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked (KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are pro-
cause serious injury or death. grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
CAUTION! if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always seconds if the engine controller does not receive the
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition proper authorization codes from the body control mod-
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle ule.
unattended.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
SENTRY KEY® Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
or unlocked. engine being shut off after two seconds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal Replacement Keys
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon 2
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
as possible by an authorized dealer.
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
tended.
security protection.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
position.
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection. Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
been programmed to the vehicle electronics. is one that has never been programmed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an by the party responsible for compliance could void the
authorized dealer. user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Customer Key Programming VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
performed at an authorized dealer. for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
General Information thorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following au-
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the head-
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
subject to the following conditions: Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
• This device may not cause harmful interference. Rearming Of The System
• This device must accept any interference that may be If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
received, including interference that may cause unde- disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
sired operation. off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Arm The System To Disarm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition is cycled to the ⬙OFF⬙
position. (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting • Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
2
And Operating⬙ for further information). Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
• Push the LOCK button on the interior power door equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in ⬙Things
lock switch panel with the driver and/or passenger To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
door open. information).
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob (RKE) available in position.
the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-
NOTE:
Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle⬙ for further information). • The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
(RKE) transmitter. Vehicle Security Alarm.
3. If any doors are open, close them.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
power trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
alarm will sound. occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior Tamper Alert
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Security System Manual Override
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, doors using the manual door lock.
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door. 2
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
Manual Door Lock Switch
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- (IGNM)
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks 2
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
To Unlock The Doors the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Headlight Illumination On Approach turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Instrument Panel” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles To Unlatch The Trunk
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
Using The Panic Alarm
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
Sound Horn With Lock and the interior lights will turn on.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless Programming Additional Transmitters
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph performed at an authorized dealer.
(24 km/h) or greater. 2
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE:
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
• The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition battery.
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights NOTE:
and horn will remain on. • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted housing or the printed circuit board.
by the system.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Emergency Key Removal Separating The RKE Transmitter Case

2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
the seal during removal. battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it distance, check for these two conditions:
with rubbing alcohol.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two the battery is a minimum of three years. 2
halves together.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
General Information tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference. This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
• This device must accept any interference received, Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the
including interference that may cause undesired op- engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
eration. while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • Battery at an acceptable charge level
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• RKE panic button not pushed
• Low fuel indicator must not be illuminated.
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
• Vehicle security alarm not active
reduce this range.
• Ignition in OFF position
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the WARNING!
engine will remote start:
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
• Shift lever in PARK confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
• Doors closed oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
• Hood closed jury or death when inhaled.
• Trunk closed
(Continued)
• Hazard switch off
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters • Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start • Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
System, windows, door locks or other controls 2
could cause serious injury or death. • Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
Remote Start Abort Messages on Your Instrument
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
Cluster - 3.5ⴖ Electronic Vehicle Information
Cluster (EVIC) and 7ⴖ Driver Information Display To Enter Remote Start Mode
(DID)
The following messages will display in the instrument Push and release the REMOTE START button
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
start prematurely: onds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
Start request.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Remote Start mode.
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, press and release the
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
in the Remote Start mode. equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two press and release the START/STOP button (vehicles
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before NOTE: The message ⬙Remote Start Active Push Start
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. Button⬙ (vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The will display in the instrument cluster until you push the
Vehicle START button.
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
2
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
Manual Door Lock Switch

If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the trunk.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

• For personal security and safety in the event of a • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as in a location accessible to children, and do not
well as when you park and leave the vehicle. leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. mode. A child could operate power windows, other
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with controls, or move the vehicle.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to Power Door Locks
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal doors and trunk.
or the transmission gear selector. The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
(Continued) information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in 2
the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
Power Door Lock Switches When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with Doors
power door locks if: To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child-
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
Protection Door Lock system.
abled.
The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to rear edge of the door.
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is
placed in PARK. 1. Open the rear door.
3. The driver door is opened. 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar flat-
bladed object into the lock and rotate clockwise ap-
4. The doors were not previously unlocked. proximately one-quarter turn to the lock position or
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming counter clockwise to the unlock position (as indicated
by the stamped icons).
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lock Child Protection Door Lock Unlock Child Protection Door Lock
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
pull the toggle lock by the door handle (UNLOCKED raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
position), roll down the window, and open the door with sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
the outside door handle. sponse time.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door

goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
NOTE: door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
door is unlocked.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Unlock From The Passenger Side — If Equipped
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati- 2
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
All Doors” or “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver
Door.”)
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks All Doors” is
programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of
the drivers door handle. To select between “1st Press Of Key
Fob Unlocks All Doors” and “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Driver Door”, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
Transmitter In Vehicle doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position. • The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel • The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors Passive Entry door handles.
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
knobs.
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other • There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out- the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically Entry door handle.
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
door panel switch and then close the doors.
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the decklid, push the button located on the
light bar between the license plate lamps. 2
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
decklid, the decklid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-
ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
decklid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
2
Power Window Controls

1 — Window Lockout Switch
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Driver/Passenger Window Controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition location accessible to children. Occupants, particu-
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position. larly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
power window switches will remain active for up to 10 injury or death.
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The Driver One Touch Down
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
The driver door power window switch has an auto down
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
feature. Push the window switch to the second detent
formation.
and release, and the window will go down automatically.
WARNING! To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do window to stop.
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Windows Express Up And Down — If NOTE:
Equipped
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
Express Down closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
Press the switch to the second detent and release. The
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 2
window will go down automatically. switch again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
Manual Down
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
Press and hold the switch to the first detent and release closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
when you want the window to stop. first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Express Up
WARNING!
Lift the switch to the second detent and release. The
window will go up automatically. There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
Manual Up window before closing.
Lift the switch to the first detent and release when you
want the window to stop.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Reset Auto-Up the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button again
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
(setting it in the UP position).
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
Wind Buffeting
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
detent to open the window completely and continue rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
after the window is fully open. windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
Window Lockout Switch
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry 2
(RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using
the external release switch located on the underside of
the decklid overhang. The release feature will function
only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The EVIC/DID display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
Trunk Release Button
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in this section for more
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. information on trunk operation with the Passive Entry
feature.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-
the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mecha-
WARNING! nism.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,

either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release

As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the Trunk Emergency Release
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS SYSTEMS 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
Some of the most important safety features in your child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
vehicle are the restraint systems: move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints.”) 2
• Seat Belt Systems
3. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-
• Supplemental Restraints System (SRS) Air Bags sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) feature can be used
• Child Restraints
to attach child restraints. For more information on
Important Safety Precautions: LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system 4. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as seat belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints”) should
possible. be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
5. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
them or under their arm.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6. You should read the instructions provided with your
WARNING!
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
7. All occupants should always wear their lap and an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
shoulder belts properly. Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved facing child restraint.
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front • Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
Air Bags room to inflate. with a rear seat.
9. Do not lean against the door or window. If your Seat Belt Systems
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
between you and the door and you could be injured. on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
10. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be happen far away from home or on your own street.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙ can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
be belted at all times. are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat 2
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than
(BeltAlert®)
5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the visual notification.
driver and outboard front passenger (if equipped with
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not
outboard front passenger BeltAlert®) to buckle their
active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoc-
seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition
cupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an animal or
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or
driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,
when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are se-
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle cured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
BeltAlert® can be activated or deactivated by your au-
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
thorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recom-
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
mend deactivating BeltAlert®.
duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: If BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
WARNING!
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unbuckled. severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
Lap/Shoulder Belts with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with Always wear your seat belt even though you have
lap/shoulder belts. air bags.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul- much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
belts. the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your 2
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
using a seat belt properly. belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
injuries in a collision much worse. You might a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
safe, too. it fixed.
• Two people should never be belted into a single • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
another in a collision, hurting one another badly. ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
than one person, no matter what their size. buckle nearest you.
(Continued) (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far you from injury during a collision. You are more
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
your seat belt snugly. wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger- are meant to be used together.
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli- the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
sion. replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or 2
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
shoulder belt.
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Anchorage
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you pant, it must be removed.
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position. WARNING!
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows required in order to properly fit the original seat
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
position without pushing or squeezing the release but- if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
locked into position. • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
Seat Belt Extender increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper recommended seating positions. Remove and store
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
worn snugly and positioned properly.
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- 2
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take Energy Management Feature
the force if there is a collision.
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Seat Belt Pretensioner Management feature in the front seating positions that
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing manner.
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you
WARNING!
will hear a ratcheting sound as the seat belt retracts.
Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front 2
necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
hear a ⬙click.⬙ facing child restraint.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto- • Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to with a rear seat.
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating posi-
tions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this the entire seat belt is extracted.
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
locking mode. only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
WARNING! the child.
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working Air Bag System Components
properly when checked according to the proce- Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
dures in the Service Manual. system components:
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions. • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
(Continued)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Knee Impact Bolsters Advanced Front Air Bags
• Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
• Supplemental Side Air Bags belt systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Bag is 2
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passen-
ger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instru-
• Front and Side Impact Sensors ment panel, above the glove compartment. The words
• Seat Belt Pretenioners SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
Locations 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag with a rear seat.
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Advanced Front Air Bag Features This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the 2
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
Advanced Front Air Bags.
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
sensors or other system components. Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
determined by the OCS.
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the • No objects should be placed over or near the air
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
seat position. because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
damage the air bags and you could be injured vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
because the air bags may no longer be functional. of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
designed to open only when the air bags are collisions, including some that may produce substantial
inflating. vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al- with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air severe initial deceleration.
bags.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, Passenger Seat
away from an inflating air bag. The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Ad- 2
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occu-
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
Advanced Front Air Bags. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right following:
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to • Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while located in the front passenger seat
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. • Air Bag Warning Light
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor • The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo- • The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any senger, including a child; or
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas-
child restraint; or
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu-
nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may • The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important Front Passenger Seat Oc- Front Passenger Air
for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop- cupant Status Bag Output
erly wearing the seat belt. Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power de-
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger ployment
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the Child, including a child in Reduced-power de-
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if a forward-facing child re- ployment OR Full-
the OCS estimates that: straint or booster seat* power deployment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Passenger Seat Oc- Front Passenger Air WARNING!

cupant Status Bag Output
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
OR reduced-power de- an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front 2
ployment Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power de- facing child restraint.
ployment • Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, with a rear seat.
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag • Children 12 years or younger should always ride
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front buckled up in a rear seat.
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front pas- The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
senger seat. classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults) Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the 2
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. front passenger seat may result in a full-power deploy-
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly • The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter- ment panel).
mines the most probable classification of the occupant • The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
that it detects. to face the rear of the vehicle.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or • The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted position.
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working • The front passenger carries or holds an object while
improperly. seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output Not Seated Properly
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
Not Seated Properly • Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
properly, which may result in serious injury or seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the 2
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
floor under the front passenger seat. take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only Chrysler
Group LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS • Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
may affect the operation of the air bag system. components in any way.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or • Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for the specific model being repaired. Always use the
service immediately. correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com- • Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. Knee Impact Bolsters
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
be modified or replaced with any part except those pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC . Air Bags.
WARNING! WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
the passenger seat assembly, its related components, bolsters in any way.
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
could result in death or serious injury to the front radios, etc.
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the 2
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
SABs are marked with a SRS AIRBAG label sewn into seat belts and body structure.
the outboard side of the seats.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SABs; the performance could be
adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim Label Location
covering the SABICs is labeled SRS AIRBAG. SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction poten-
WARNING!
tial provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win- • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains 2
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not high enough to block the deployment of the
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or • Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
windows in certain rollover or side impact events. accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de- help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
Side Air Bags should have deployed. that is appropriate for the size of the child.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
WARNING!
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously against the door or window. Sit upright in the
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should center of the seat.
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an ment could cause you to be severely injured or
infant or child restraint. killed.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you including some collisions at certain angles, or some side 2
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
though you have Side Air Bags. angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
Rollover Events
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
Side Impacts
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
determining the appropriate response to impact events. priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
event may be in progress and whether deployment is If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the or all of the following may occur:
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
sioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
experiences a near rollover event.
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
If A Deployment Occurs significantly within a few days, or if you have any
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate blistering, see your doctor immediately.
immediately after deployment. • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
the air bag system. bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in- authorized dealer immediately.
structions for cleaning.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- In the event of an impact, if the communication network 2
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
bags will not be in place to protect you. on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
WARNING! tem perform the following functions:
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot • Cut off fuel to the engine.
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme- until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller tion.
System serviced as well. • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is
NOTE:
turned to the “OFF” position.
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Unlock the doors automatically.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
System Reset Procedure The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
OFF. instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
Air Bag Warning Light
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control- function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
system electrical components. again after initial startup.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
WARNING!
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags 2
first turned to the ON/RUN position. to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
eight-second interval. on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or air bag system immediately.
remains on while driving. Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec- Warning Light will illuminate on the instru-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag ment panel.
system immediately.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The Redundant Warning Light will stay on until the fault Maintaining Your Air Bag System
is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert
you that the Redundant Warning Light has come on and WARNING!
a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Warning
Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driv- • Modifications to any part of the air bag system
ing have an authorized dealer service the vehicle imme- could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
diately. be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
For additional information regarding the Redundant wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
this manual. upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
not function properly if modifications are made. certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air 2
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
air bag system service. If your seat, including your assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved is designed to record such data as:
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer. • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- province, requires that small children ride in proper
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- ecuted for ignoring it.
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
crash investigation. buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is the rear seats rather than in the front.
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, WARNING!
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
vehicle or the EDR. projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
great that you could not hold the child, no matter Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
how strong you are. The child and others could be it in the vehicle where you will use it.
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle 2
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian resi-
children from newborn size to the child almost large
dents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
additional information:
Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc- • www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual childsafety-index-53.htm
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
height or weight limits of their child rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Small Children Children who are at least two years old Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
or who have out-grown the height or five-point Harness, facing forward in the
weight limit of their rear-facing child rear seat of the vehicle
restraint
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
forward-facing child restraint, but are vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s of the vehicle
seat belt
Children Too Large for Children 12 years old or younger, who Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
Child Restraints have out-grown the height or weight of the vehicle
limit of their booster seat
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Infants And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front 2
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
It is recommended for children from birth until they with a rear seat.
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or Older Children And Child Restraints
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
carrier but are still less than at least two years old. tion are for children who are over two years old or who
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
child seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
WARNING!
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
All children whose weight or height is above the infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a collision. The child could be badly injured or
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over directions exactly when installing an infant or
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against child restraint.
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
in the vehicle by the seat belt. because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor- 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the 2
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it way back?
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
serious personal injury. between their neck and arm?
Children Too Large For Booster Seats 4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
WARNING!
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or serious injury or death. A child must always wear
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
correctly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
Weight of the LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top 2
Child + Child Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor
Restraint Only + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing More than X
Child Restraint 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
Restraint System age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

seating position
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
weight of the child restraint) for using the the combined weight of the child and the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
restraint? seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH anchorage system once the com-
bined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
belt be used together to attach a rear- LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center Yes You can install child restraints with flexible
position using the inner LATCH lower an- lower anchors in the center position. The
chorages? inner anchorages are 17.7 inches (450 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Can two child restraints be attached using No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
a common lower LATCH anchorage? two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in- 2
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
the back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints may be removed
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each

rear seating position located in the panel be- 2
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-
Center Seat LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical in-
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach- stallation instructions.
ments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child Always follow the directions of the child restraint
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach- manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
ments can be installed in any rear seating position. all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
WARNING! To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
compatible child restraints next to each other, you belt following the instructions below. See the section
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions. 2
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to in any direction.
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt:
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat. When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
ing position. with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
tions to attach a tether anchor. the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock Belt
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
them. (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
WARNING! necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re- webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed. retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with- refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted der “Occupant Restraints.”
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
What is the weight limit (child’s Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child re- using the seat belt to install a for-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor ward facing child restraint, up to
with the seat belt to attach a forward the recommended weight limit of
facing child restraint? the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint Yes Contact between the front passen-
touch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat? allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re- Yes All head restraints may be re-
moved? moved.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the seating position with an ALR re-
seat belt path of the child restraint? tractor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
position. For some second row seats, you may need to retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
2
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
rear-most position to make room for the child seat. locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
You may also move the front seat forward to allow bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor lap portion around the child restraint while you push
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint. the child restraint rearward and downward into the
Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path. vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
“click”.
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
against the child seat. the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt behind the seat where you are placing the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) restraint.
in any direction.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
Anchorage
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
1. Look behind the seating position where you side of the head restraint.
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING! 2
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
Tether Strap Mounting opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to

the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Transporting Pets While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
mental and should be avoided.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
hicle”.
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). CAUTION!
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
not interpreted as a problem. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously 2
SAFETY TIPS injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
Transporting Passengers
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO belts.
AREA. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. blower at high speed.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
follow these safety tips: the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in system.
confined areas any longer than needed to move Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
your vehicle in or out of the area. system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
mode. seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
(Continued) inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
Vehicle light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for Defroster 2
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
system. feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
able.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
Air Bag Warning Light unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per- properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
sonal injury. been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
attached to the floor mat fasteners. driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer- control.
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the • If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
vehicle. stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mounting can cause interference with the brake
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
pedal area and interfere with the pedals. control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Door Latches
The Vehicle Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
2
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
should be located and corrected immediately.
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .132 3
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .122 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .132
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .123 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .147 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .160
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .149 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .153
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .163
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .170 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
3
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .173 䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .185
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .175
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .186
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .176
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 ▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — ▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 ▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .213
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .192
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .197
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .199
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .202
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .209 ▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 ▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .247
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .228 䡵 PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 ▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active 3
Park Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .230
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
䡵 PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .245 ▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .246 ▫ Sunglass Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .281 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . .282 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .285 ▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .286 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .290
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 ▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .297 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .297 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .297 ▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
3
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .297 ▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .310
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ▫ Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Grocery Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ▫ Ski Pass-Through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .302 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped • Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is the feature Off.
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, 3
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-
abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
On or Off through the touchscreen. a 9-1-1 button.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only vehicle issues.
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is 9-1-1 Call
active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement
manual” for further information. 1. Press the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
ASSIST Call NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
to any one of the following support centers:
9-1-1 Call connection, press the 9-1-1 Call button on the
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
tow, just press the Assist button and you’ll be con- Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to
operator: determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call. operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you 3
• The vehicle brand. or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle. the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to
remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator operator terminates the connection.
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed. 5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with impor-
tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., • The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
immediately and move to a safe location. signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
(Continued) never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-
TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system red.
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system • The Phone Screen will display the following message
is not there to help protect you. “Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.” 3
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and WARNING!
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls. • Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
following may occur at the time the malfunction is Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle: dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on • The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel damaged during a crash.
if a malfunction in any part of the system is • The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi- nected during a vehicle crash.
nated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to • Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag are unavailable or obstructed.
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized • Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
dealer service the ORC system immediately.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
• Wireless network congestion.
beyond Chrysler Group LLC’s control may prevent or
stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but • Weather.
are not limited to, the following factors:
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
• The ignition key has been removed from the ignition
and the delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition key is in OFF position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s Outside Mirrors
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly. NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will 3
General Information give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) WARNING!
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, includ- Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
ing interference that may cause undesired operation. convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
CAUTION! passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent
three detent positions:
to the Front and Rear Doors.
• Full forward position
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30
• Full rearward position seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
• Normal position
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
and puddle lamp contain three LEDs. Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators,
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard
slightly downward from the present position when the
Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the 3
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the drivers door
Power Mirror Control
trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
move. the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-
ing the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip. 3
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF

EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar- Rear Detection Zones
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the to let the driver know that the system is operational.
rear/front/side of the vehicle. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
BSM Warning Light other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the contamination so that the BSM system can function
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where Entering From The Side
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
side of the vehicle.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an 3
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Entering From The Rear Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Overtaking/Approaching Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Stationary Objects Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
3
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed RCP Detection Zones
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Modes Of Operation
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
system will not be able to alert the driver. Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
WARNING! system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a the system will respond with both visual and audible
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
death. priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an Blind Spot Alert Off
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
tected object are present on the same side at the same systems.
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating 3
muted. mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
NOTE:
used.
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
General Information
system, the radio is also muted.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
the appropriate visual alert only.
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the 1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
RCP state always requests the chime.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
other than an authorized service facility could void more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
authorization to use this equipment. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Power Seats — If Equipped
vehicle. Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
WARNING! side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or seat up, down, forward or rearward.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
3
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
when the desired position has been reached. the switch when the desired position has been reached.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power drivers seat may be
equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch
is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push
the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease
Power Seat Recliner Switch
the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or down-
ward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Lumbar Switch Front Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats — If Equipped While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. the seat adjusters have latched.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment

Recline Lever
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired WARNING!
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by The front heated seats control buttons are located within
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
• Press the heated seat button once to turn the High 3
setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn
the Low setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-
Seat Height Adjustment proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
WARNING!
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-
cally after approximately 45 minutes. • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
to operate. spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
On models that are equipped with remote start, the even at low temperatures, especially if used for
heated seats can be programed to come on during a long periods of time.
remote start. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand- in a seat that has been overheated could cause
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the seats to operate.
air from the passenger compartment and blow air Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep
the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient On models that are equipped with remote start, the
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HIGH and ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a 3
LOW. remote start.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
screen. Head Restraints
• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
HIGH. by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
• Press the ventilated seat button a second time to impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
choose LOW. of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to

turn the ventilated seat OFF.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
WARNING!
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- downward on the head restraint.
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats

The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
Push Button
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position
following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not return to their
normal position see your authorized dealer immediately.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by Rear Head Restraints
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho- UP, MID and DOWN. The center head restraint has only
rized dealer. two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
WARNING! position. When there are no occupants in the center seat 3
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD for the driver.
players. These items may interfere with the operation To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
collision and could result in serious injury or death. button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops to fold down either
or both seatbacks.
Push Button
Rear Seat Release Loops
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When returning the rear seatback to the upright position, DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
be sure the seatback is latched. This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
WARNING! switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into desired radio station presets. 3
position the seat will not provide the proper stabil- The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
ity for child seats and/or passengers. An improp- panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to
erly latched seat could cause serious injury. activate the memory save function, the number (1)
• The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear memory button and the number (2) memory button. The
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down posi- memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the
tion) should not be used as a play area by children. two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
They could be seriously injured in a collision. appropriate number button on the switch.
Children should be seated and using the proper
restraint system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the number (1) button within five
seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), will
display which memory position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
memory as follows:
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.
Driver Memory Switch 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-
Programming The Memory Feature ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then press the number (2) button within five
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
seconds. The EVIC/DID will display which memory
existing profile from memory.
position is being set.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings ”
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
memory profile.
information.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow- 3
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry ing:
Transmitter To Memory” in this section.
1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory 2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can be 3. Press and release the SET button on the memory
programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed switch, then within five seconds press and release the
memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. “Memory Profile
the RKE transmitter. Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC/DID.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter within 10 seconds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your recall is cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A
memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button, and delay of one second will occur before another recall can
within 10 seconds, followed by pressing the UNLOCK be selected.
button on the RKE transmitter.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
Memory Position Recall This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not vehicle.
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC/DID. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
• When you cycle the vehicles ignition to the OFF
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2. or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the The seat will return to its previously set position when
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a you cycle the vehicles ignition to the ACC or RUN
position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) To open the hood, two levers must be released.
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit 1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
or Easy Entry. panel and in front of the driver’s door.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy 3
Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
Hood Release Lever

2. Move to the front of the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Safety Latch Lever Location Safety Latch Lever

3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and 4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
push and hold the safety latch lever to the right.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
LIGHTS
CAUTION!
Headlight Switch
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage. The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the 3
operation of the headlights, parking lights, auto-
WARNING! matic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights,
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open lights — if equipped.
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on,
the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means
the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you
place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
Headlight Switch lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
Automatic Headlights Only) position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the 3
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by delay.
this feature. If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turn off in the normal manner.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to NOTE:
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for • The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
further information. placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
Headlight Time Delay
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
vehicle in an unlit area.
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
Equipped lens will cause the system to function improperly.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat- Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera dealer.
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
To Activate
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view. 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
NOTE:
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
ment Panel” for further information. at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Deactivate NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to 3
Lights-On Reminder
reactivate the system.
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
engine is running, and the transmission is not in the
PARK position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
used for normal nighttime driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Fog Lights — If Equipped headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
headlight switch.
switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Multifunction Lever Turn Signals
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
steering column.
NOTE:
3
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved,
it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC/DID
and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn
Multifunction Lever signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will
turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lane Change Assist Front Map/Reading Lights
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash head console.
three times then automatically turn off. Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
High/Low Beam Switch There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever operate independently.
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. Press the button once to turn the light on.
Flash-To-Pass To turn the light off, press the button a second time.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons Front Map/Reading Lights Press Lenses
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Press Lenses NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened.
The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen- The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on
dently by pressing the lenses. the RKE is pressed.
Press the lens once to turn the light on.

To turn the light off, press the lens a second time.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior Lights With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the
instrument panel. Instrument Panel Dimmer
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped Dome Light Position
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or down- Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely
ward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambi- upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights.
ent light located in the overhead console, door handle The interior lights will remain on when the instrument
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and panel dimmer control is in this position.
cubby bin lights. 3
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the ex-
treme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will
remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC/DID, and radio when the
position lights or headlights are on.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Battery Saver Feature
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotat-
ing a switch, located on the end of the lever. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Windshield Wiper Operation NOTE: If snow packing occurs that obstructs the normal
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent operation of the windshield wipers the following mes-
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low sage will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID):
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation. ⬙Front Wipers Blocked Cycle Switch or Clean the Wind-
shield⬙. It is important to remove the snow accumulation 3
to allow the wipers to function normally and to maintain
good visibility of the road.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Intermittent Wiper Operation

NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval pre- 3
viously selected.
Windshield Washer Operation

If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
WARNING!
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
could lead to a collision. You might not see other spray the windshield with washer fluid.
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
Mist Control
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
shield.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings 3
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
to activate this feature.
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least for further information.
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
following conditions:
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch • Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
in the OFF position when not using the system. first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
NOTE:
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
lever/gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL the steering column.
position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
column in position, push the control handle up until fully to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The 3
engaged. heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
WARNING!
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to • Press the heated steering wheel button once to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or turn the heating element ON.
death. • Press the heated steering wheel button a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system. wheel covers of any type and material. This may
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, (40 km/h).
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
right side of the steering wheel.
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired 3
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Electronic Speed Control Buttons Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,
1 — ON/OFF 4 — SET-/DECEL push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
2 — SET+/ACCEL 5 — CANCEL Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
3 — RESUME turned off when not in use.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Deactivate
WARNING!
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. out erasing the set speed from memory.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Set A Desired Speed
To Resume Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
and on level ground before pressing the SET (+) or SET (-) 20 mph (32 km/h).
button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
To Increase Speed
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
speed. crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen To Decrease Speed
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
U.S. Speed (mph) crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): 3
button results in an increase of 1 mph. U.S. Speed (mph)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
continue to increase until the button is released, then decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
the new set speed will be established. button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
Metric Speed (km/h) • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h continue to decrease until the button is released, then
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the the new set speed will be established.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h. Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
continue to increase until the button is released, then decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
the new set speed will be established. button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
WARNING!
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established. Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
To Accelerate For Passing system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
vehicle set speed. EQUIPPED
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
moderate hills is normal. on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
WARNING!
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a system. It is not a substitute for active driving
vehicle directly ahead of you. involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibil-
NOTE: ity to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather 3
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed. ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will conditions. Your complete attention is always re-
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed quired while driving to maintain safe control of
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
preset following distance, while matching the speed of result in a collision and death or serious personal
the vehicle ahead. injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi- • When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
tions into account, and may be limited upon when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-
adverse sight distance conditions. covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving slopes.
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing • When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
distance warnings. • When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while constant speed.
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position. The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
If the target vehicle does not start moving within • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
3 minutes the parking brake will be activated, appropriate distance between vehicles.
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system: • Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
in highway construction zones). Control Mode” in this section.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected. 3
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
6 — ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
7 — DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
8 — CANCEL
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions:
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• When you apply the brakes.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When the parking brake is set.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h). • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE-
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h). • When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the brakes are overheated.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or • When the driver door is open.
Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.” • When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adap-

tive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Activate/Deactivate time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID
displays “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
WARNING!
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
on when not in use is dangerous. You could acciden- not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
tally set the system or cause it to go faster than you speed. If this occurs:
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using • The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
it. the EVIC/DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be-
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the speed will only be determined by the position of the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The accelerator pedal.
EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
To Cancel
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to The following conditions cancel the system:
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle • The brake pedal is applied.
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle. • The CANCEL button is pressed.
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the To Resume
Drive position. If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
tem (ESC/TCS) activates. pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied. NOTE: 3
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds. • If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to press the
• Driver door is opened at low speeds. RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
To Turn Off reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in • ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
memory if: in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
is pressed.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pressed.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
WARNING!
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
The Resume function should only be used if traffic U.S. Speed (mph)
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to button results in an increase of 1 mph.
follow these warnings can result in a collision and • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
death or serious personal injury. continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
To Vary The Speed Setting button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
To Increase Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing the SET + button. • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will Metric Speed (km/h)
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
in the EVIC/DID.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will 3
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
pressing the SET - button. button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen flected in the EVIC/DID.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): NOTE:
U.S. Speed (mph) • When you override and push the SET + button or SET
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph - buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the of the vehicle.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph. • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re- will automatically slow the vehicle.
flected in the EVIC/DID.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop Setting The Following Distance In ACC
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
seconds the driver will either have to press the RES three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed. calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending down-
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Set-
ting — Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar
(longer).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the ACC Activation).
button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how-
bar (shorter).
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the necessary.
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the 3
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle
ACC system applies the brakes.
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
of the set speed. that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
speed. braking capacity.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional accelera-
tion to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic,
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left
hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
Brake Alert condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warn- the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
applying the brakes autonomously. longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ACC Operation At Stop While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be cancelled.
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action. WARNING! 3
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
will either have to press the RES (resume) button, or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the these warnings can result in a collision and death or
existing Set Speed. serious personal injury.
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system set-
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
tings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the
be cancelled.
instrument cluster. The information it displays depends
on ACC system status.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
• Distance Setting Change
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap-
• Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Off
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Proximity Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • ACC Unavailable Warning
Control Ready.”
• The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the after five seconds of no ACC display activity
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
EVIC/DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Display Warnings And Maintenance vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
this warning may temporarily occur.
Warning
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise 3
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and
vehicle behind the lower grille.
the system will deactivate.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor-
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
tant to note the following maintenance items:
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or • Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so NOTE:
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
require a sensor realignment.
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service. other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
your authorized dealer.
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an after-
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
malfunction. mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive “Clean Front Windshield” Warning
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
simply reactivating it. Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system per-
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibil-
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and When the condition that created limited functionality is
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID no longer present, the system will return to full function-
will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean ality.
Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
performance.
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or 3
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
temporarily occur. “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”or “Cruise/
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
examine the windshield and the camera located on the limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be tempo-
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. rarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following a key cycle. If the problem persists, see
your authorized dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpect-
edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
NOTE: Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Offset Driving Condition Example
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and Turns And Bends
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
brake or accelerate unexpectedly. may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality. your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC perfor-
mance may be limited.
3
Turn Or Bend Example ACC Hill Example
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be atten-
tive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Narrow Vehicles Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. 3
Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
General Information Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310. for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference. the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, press the
eration of the device. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CON-
authorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (chang-
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
trol mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON-
WARNING!
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity speed control is SET.
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound To Vary The Speed Setting
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since 3
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the To Increase Speed
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Con-
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and trol is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET +
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is button.
selected.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
To Set A Desired Speed U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
SET (-) button and release. Release the accel- button results in an increase of 1 mph.
erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will Metric Speed (km/h)
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID display.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
To Decrease Speed
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
you can decrease speed by pressing the SET - button. button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed flected in the EVIC/DID display.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units: To Cancel
U.S. Speed (mph) The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
memory:
button results in a decrease of 1 mph. • The brake pedal is applied.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • The CANCEL button is pressed.
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys-
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re-
flected in the EVIC/DID display. tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The vehicle parking brake is applied. • The ignition is turned off.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (over- • The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
heated). pressed.
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
Drive position. MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED 3
To Resume Speed Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button Operation
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
20 mph (32 km/h). mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
To Turn Off visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply
a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
memory if: intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
ON/OFF button is pressed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle com-
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. pletely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
When the system determines that a forward collision is two seconds and then release the brakes.
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system deter-
mines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system FCW Message
may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning surroundings.
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect 3
(2 km/h).
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
normal FCW activation and functionality.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
will be deactivated until the next key cycle. vehicle in front of you.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If The forward collision button is located on the switch
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should panel below the Uconnect® display.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (LED turns
off).
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near
warns the driver later.
• Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents
Forward Collision Button the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status NOTE:
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are • The system will retain the last setting selected by the
programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to driver after ignition shut down.
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the 3
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in higher rate of speed.
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
avoid a possible collision. screens.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows FCW Limited Warning
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Lim-
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, ited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, the active braking may not be fully available.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Once the condition that limited the system performance LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
is no longer present, the system will return to its full detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
performance state. If the problem persists, see your within the lane boundaries.
authorized dealer. When both lane markings are detected and the driver
Service FCW Warning unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warn-
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although through the EVIC/DID to prompt the driver to remain
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have within the lane boundaries.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
LaneSense Operation When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be
provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning 3
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
LaneSense Warning Button
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel To turn the LaneSense system ON, press the LaneSense
below the Uconnect® display. button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is
shown in the Driver Information Display (DID).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
Lane Sense On Message

To turn the LaneSense system OFF, press the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
3
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane mark-
ing has been detected and the system is ready to
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
lane departure occurs.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure oc-
curs. Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
the steering wheel will turn to the right. changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right. 3
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow

Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured
through the Uconnect® system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Press the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator) warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the person-
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar alization settings.
behavior for a right lane departure.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). changed to the ON/RUN position.
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings. ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain 3
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes, active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-
traction control system, electronic stability control, mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
forward collision warning, etc.) and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating
EQUIPPED the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds
and audible indications of the distance between the rear less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ParkSense® Sensors The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the de-
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
tected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- ParkSense® Display
tion of the obstacle.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will
ParkSense® Warning Display display the park assist ready system status.
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer - a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys- distance and location relative to the vehicle.
tem. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. 3
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis- Greater 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
tance than (200-150 (150-120 (120-100 (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in
(in/cm) 79 in cm) cm) cm) (30 cm)
(200 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
ing
Arcs — None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash- 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Center ing ing
Arcs — None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Right ing
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING ALERTS
Audible None Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Alert Second (for rear (for rear (for rear
Chime Tone center center center
(for rear only) only) only)
center 3
only)
Radio Vol- No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ume Re-
duced
NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the system, the instrument cluster will display the
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-
onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
the Uconnect® display.
(EVIC) or 7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the shift lever is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and re-
quires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense® Switch
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN-
System SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the 3
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for further
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
information. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved
to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
condition, the EVIC/DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ age the sensors.
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions • ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
NOTE:
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper-
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
ating properly.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
affect the performance of ParkSense®. obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
• When you turn ParkSense® OFF, the instrument clus-
bumper.
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn • Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key. system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the EVIC/
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
DID will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
EVIC/DID.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! WARNING!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to • Drivers must be careful when backing up even
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, 3
the sensors will not be detected when they are in obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
close proximity. You are responsible for safety and must continue to
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time can result in serious injury or death.
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when (Continued)
using ParkSense®.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmis-
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom- sion, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem- and released when performing a reverse parking maneu-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the ver if the system detects a possible collision with an
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can obstacle.
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the NOTE:
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker • The driver can override the automatic braking func-
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors tion by pressing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense® off
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem- via ParkSense® switch, or changing the gear while the
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false automatic brakes are being applied.
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — available.
IF EQUIPPED • Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and faulted condition detected with the ParkSense® Park
audible indications of the distance between the rear Assist system or the Braking System Module.
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if NOTE:
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid-
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
ing with a detected obstacle.
vehicle.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
substitute the driver. 3
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
vehicle’s movements.
section of the Uconnect® System.
Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limi-
• ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration
tations of this system and recommendations.
state for the automatic braking function through igni-
tion cycles. ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
changed to the ON/RUN position.
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected ob-
stacles when backing up in REVERSE gear. ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of
these shift lever positions, the system will remain active
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense®
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear in the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense® Active
the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. Park Assist System⬙ section for further information.
The system will become active again if the vehicle speed The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/
is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
(9 km/h). within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
ParkSense® Sensors obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
tion of the obstacle.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in ParkSense® Warning Display
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- Sound and Display is selected from the Customer -
tion of the obstacle. Programmable Features section of the Uconnect® Sys-
tem. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous. 3
7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for further infor-
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
mation. region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
ParkSense® Display left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
Rear Park Assist
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the EVIC/DID will vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
display the park assist ready system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING ALERTS 3
Rear Dis- Greater 79-59 in 59-47 in 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
tance than (200-150 (150-120 (120-100 (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30
(in/cm) 79 in (200 cm) cm) cm) cm)
cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
ing
Arcs — None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash- 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Center ing ing
Arcs — None None None None None 2nd Flash- 1st Flashing
Right ing
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING ALERTS
Audible None Single 1/2- Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Alert Second (for rear (for rear (for rear
Chime Tone center center center
(for rear only) only) only)
center
only)
Radio Vol- No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
ume Re-
duced
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Park Assist fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense® Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected. when the 1st flashing arc appears.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast 3
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
display will show a single arc in the center front region. vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
No Tone/Solid Arc No Tone/Flashing Arc
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance Greater than 47-39 in 39-25 in 25-12 in Less than
(in/cm) 47 in (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 in (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert None None None Fast Continuous
Chime
Radio Volume No No No Yes Yes
Reduced
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and the Uconnect® display.
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
3
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
If the Uconnect® System is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. ParkSense® Switch
ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state When the ParkSense® switch is pressed to disable the
through ignition cycles. system, the instrument cluster will display the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec- REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
(EVIC) or 7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
further information. When the shift lever is moved to When the shift lever is moved to Reverse and the system
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic Vehicle
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
the vehicle is in REVERSE. (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when
FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds.
ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is
After five seconds, a car graphic will be displayed with
enabled. If the ParkSense® switch is pressed, and re-
⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor loca-
quires service, the ParkSense® switch LED will blink
tion depending on where the fault is detected. The
momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.
system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that
Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙,
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it SORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-
will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE QUIRED⬙ messages if an object is detected within the five
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain Cleaning The ParkSense® System
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or ⬙ and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
Driver Information Display (DID)” for further informa- scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
tion. age the sensors.
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ 3
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-
SORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information NOTE:
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense®
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
system operating properly.
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
an authorized dealer. affect the performance of ParkSense®.
If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE- • When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
authorized dealer. you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
the vehicle is in REVERSE. instrument cluster.
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the • There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
radio when it is sounding a tone. object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
application to be delayed.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
CAUTION!
Failure to do so can result in the system not working • ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. the sensors will not be detected when they are in
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense® close proximity.
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
(Continued)
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using • Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
using ParkSense®. result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
3
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
WARNING! obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
PARKSENSE® ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — • The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
IF EQUIPPED substitute the driver.
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is intended to • During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular park- touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
ing maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, remove their hands from the steering wheel, the sys-
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling tem will cancel, and the driver will be required to
the steering wheel. The ParkSense® Active Park Assist manually complete the parking maneuver.
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
maintains control of the accelerator, shift lever and
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow,
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
selection, the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver • New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
side or passenger side). miles accumulated before the ParkSense® Active Park
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accu-
NOTE:
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The system will also continuously perform the dy-
namic vehicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense® Active
Park Assist System
3
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system can be en-
abled and disabled with the ParkSense® Active Park
Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect® display.
ParkSense® Active Park Assist Switch

To enable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,
press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system,
press the ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch again
(LED turns off).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will turn off • The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
automatically for any of the following conditions: maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
• The parking maneuver is completed.
the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
searching for a parking space.
The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will only
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during operate and search for a parking space when the follow-
active steering guidance into the parking space. ing conditions are present:
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering • The gear position is in DRIVE.
guidance into the parking space.
• The ignition is in the RUN position.
• Pressing the ParkSense® Front and Rear Park Assist
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch is activated.
switch.
• The Driver’s door is closed.
• The Driver’s door is opened.
• The trunk is closed.
• The trunk is opened.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
• Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC/DID will instruct the driver Display
to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi- When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
mately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
driver must then reactivate the system by pressing the Perpendicular Park” message will appear in the Driver
ParkSense® Active Park Assist switch. Information Display (DID). You may switch to perpen- 3
• The outer surface and the underside of the front and dicular parking if you desire. Push the OK button on the
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, left side steering wheel switch to change your parking
mud, dirt or other obstruction. space setting.
When pressed, the LED on the ParkSense® Active Park NOTE:
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
present.
want to perform the parking maneuver. The
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automati-
cally search for a parking space on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
Active ParkSense Searching
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
When an available parking space has been found, and the
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking
parking space for the maneuver).
sequence.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to Wheel
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands
from the steering wheel. removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move backward.
steering to complete.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, 3
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
Check Surroundings — Move Backward provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
NOTE: tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu- • If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
ver. reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement. surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re-
quired.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE The system will then instruct the driver to check their
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for surroundings and move forward.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Surroundings — Move Forward Check Surroundings — STOP

When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement. surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
quired.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the RE-
VERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

The system will then instruct the driver to check their
surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Surroundings — Move Backward Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to Operation/Display
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is When the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Perpendicular Park” message will show in the DID
Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed. display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a NOTE:
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to paral-
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
lel parking if you desire.
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
Once the driver presses OK for a perpendicular parking want to perform the parking maneuver. The
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will automati-
for Parallel Park” message will appear in the DID display. cally search for a parking space on the passenger’s side 3
of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrud-
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
Active ParkSense Searching Display

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
parking sequence.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
Wheel When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed steering to complete.
to place the shift lever into the REVERSE position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
The system will then instruct the driver to check their NOTE:
surroundings and move backward.
• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneu-
ver.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly. their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, 3
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
quired.
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the DRIVE
position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive

When the driver places the shift lever into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Forward
The system will then instruct the driver to check their When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
surroundings and move forward. movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
will be instructed to place the shift lever into the RE-
VERSE position.

NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re- When the driver places the shift lever into the REVERSE
quired. position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
The system will then instruct the driver to check their Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
surroundings and move backward. When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be in-
structed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense® Active Park Assist system is only
a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense® Active Park Assist system in order to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position It is recommended that the driver looks over his/
her shoulder when using the ParkSense® Active
Park Assist system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Drivers must be careful when performing parallel • Before using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist
or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
using the ParkSense® Active Park Assist system. mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
Always check carefully behind and in front of your
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
3
vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other ve- damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
hicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back- ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
ing up and moving forward. You are responsible rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
for safety and must continue to pay attention to tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
serious injury or death. size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a cau-
tion note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
ParkView® Camera Location
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of backup path based on the steering wheel position.
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
is switched to the OFF position. 3
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
A touch screen button to disable display of the camera
the vehicle.
image is made available when the vehicle is not in RE-
VERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out The following table shows the approximate distances for
of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen button each zone:
personalization entry in the camera settings menu.
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
CAUTION!
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
WARNING! unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
shoulder when using ParkView®.
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Power sunroof and power
sunshade switches may also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console — Power Sunroof
Overhead Console — Power Sunroof/Sunshade
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the over-
head console.
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
operate independently.
Press the button once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, press the button a second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Press Lenses NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened.
The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen- The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on
dently by pressing the lenses. the RKE is pressed.
Press the lens once to turn the light on. Sunglass Bin Door
To turn the light off, press the lens a second time. The overhead console has a compartment which provides 3
storage for a pair of sunglasses.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear mounted or
front mounted sunglass bin door.
The storage compartment access is a “push/push” de-
sign. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to
open. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to
close.
Front Map/Reading Lights Press Lenses

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Sunglass Bin Door — Rear Mounted Sunglass Bin Door — Front Mounted
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery. 3
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the sun visor
designate the three different HomeLink® channels.
HomeLink® Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door
WARNING!
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close by federal safety standards. This includes most garage
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other a garage door opener without these safety features. Call
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal tance.
safety standards. This includes most garage door Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features. Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at before you begin programming.
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as- For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sistance. sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can system.
cause serious injury or death.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® open and close the door. The name and color of the
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red button may vary by manufacturer.
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
3
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
Training The Garage Door Opener
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located 1 — Door Opener
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door 2 — Training Button
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
away from the HomeLink® button you wish to pro-
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
gram while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
view.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button. 6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid. complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button Programming A Non-Rolling Code
(Rolling Code) For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, before 1995.
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 3
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
not release the button.
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- program while you push and hold the hand-held
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining transmitter button.
steps.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
and observe the indicator light. ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- remaining steps.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT several seconds of transmission.
erase the channels.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
(Non-Rolling Code) mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
follow these steps: Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do door or gate motor.
not release the button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to and observe the indicator light.
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator • If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
light in view. ming is complete and the garage door/device should
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button, activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held • To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, 3
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- erase the channels.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
fully trained. programming, plug it back in at this time.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take (Canadian/Gate Operator)
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
not release the button. channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
follow all remaining steps. the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Using HomeLink® Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, push and release the programmed If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the here are some of the most common solutions:
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera- • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light- ter.
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time. • Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
Security
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn remember to plug it back in?
in your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance. that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
WARNING! door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger- tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
3
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause assistance.
serious injury or death.
General Information
WARNING! This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
Your motorized door or gate will open and close two conditions:
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located between the sun Sunroof Switch
visors on the overhead console. 1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of 3
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in Opening Sunroof — Express
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
by the power sunroof while operating the power second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
serious injury or death. open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured. To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again. the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
Closing Sunroof — Express struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
release to Express Close.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
the sunroof. a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode Venting Sunroof — Express
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the Press and release the Vent button within one half second
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
forward again. movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Sunshade Operation Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
open. The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 3
Wind Buffeting approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
will cancel this feature.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Shade Switches
Power Sunroof Switches

The power shade switches are located to the right be-
tween the sun visors on the overhead console.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of 3
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in Opening Sunroof — Express
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped Press the sunroof switch rearward and release it within
by the power sunroof while operating the power one-half second. The sunroof will open automatically to
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in the full open position and automatically stop. (If the
serious injury or death. sunshade is in the closed position when the operation is
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could open position prior to the sunroof opening). This is called
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen- movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward. To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
The sunroof will (if the sunshade is in the closed position forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
when the operation is initiated the sunshade will auto- movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
matically open to the half open position prior to the closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
sunroof opening) open to the full open position and forward again.
automatically stop. Any release of the switch will stop the
Venting Sunroof — Express
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half sec-
held again. ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
Closing Sunroof — Express
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
vent switch is pressed, the sunshade will automatically
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
opening to the Vent position.
the sunroof.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Opening Power Shade — Express Closing Power Shade — Express
Press the shade switch rearward and release it within Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to second and the shade will close automatically from any
the halfway position and stop automatically. Press the position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
switch a second time from the halfway position and the will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
shade will automatically open to the full open position “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any 3
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. movement of the switch will stop the shade.
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
shade switch will stop the shade.
half-open position. Pressing the shade close button again
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode will automatically close both the sunroof and shade
To open the shade, press and hold the switch rearward. completely.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
half-open position. Press and hold the shade switch
To close the shade, press and hold the switch in the
rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
again.
rearward again.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Pinch Protect Feature windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
window.
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- Sunroof Maintenance
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
release to Express Close.
the glass panel.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Ignition Off Operation
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
Wind Buffeting
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. 3
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE: All accessories connected to the “battery” pow-
ered outlets should be removed or turned off when the Front Power Outlet
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
discharge. outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
The front power outlet is located next to the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Front Center Console Outlet
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® cigar
WARNING!
knob and element must be used.
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not touch with wet hands. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
vehicle. battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric tently and with greater caution.
shock and failure. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or
3
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
CAUTION! accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or power outlet can cause damage.
prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
forward wall of storage bin (below media center) of
center console. This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the Power Inverter Outlet
inverter should automatically reset. To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device.
The outlet automatically turns off when the device is
unplugged.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CUPHOLDERS
WARNING!
Front Seat Cupholders
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. The cupholders are located in the center console forward
• Do not touch with wet hands. of the armrest between the front seats.
• Close the lid when not in use. 3
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Front Seat Cupholders
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el-
bows.
Rear Seat Cupholders
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment. 3
NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with
a lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the
emergency key from the key fob, insert emergency key
into glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn
the key to the lock position and remove the key. Use the
reverse sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Console Features The armrest can be slid forward/rearward to allow
driver/passenger comfort position.
There is a storage compartment located under the center
console armrest.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
There is a front center console storage area located under

the center console cupholder.
• To access the front center console storage area press the
release button and pull rearward.
NOTE: The center console cupholder can be placed in
Center Console Armrest Storage any position to maintain access to the storage area.
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the armrest, to open the storage compartment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Center Console Cupholder Release Front Center Console Storage

Located inside the center console storage compartment is
a line that indicates how much storage is allowed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Storage Compartment Fill Line Center Console Storage Passage

NOTE: Filling the console storage area above this line
may impede the sliding of the cupholder.
Located inside the front of the console storage area power
cords can be routed from the storage area to the center
console pass-through.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas with a bottle
holder.
Front Center Console Pass-Through
Front Door Storage
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped CARGO AREA FEATURES
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage Equipped
compartment.
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the
seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.
When the seats are folded down, they provide a continu-
ous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
NOTE: The rear seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.
Rear Armrest Storage
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear Seatback Loops Folded Rear Seatback

After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta- handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp- sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
erly latched seat could cause serious injury. vehicle:
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the • Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
position) should not be used as a play area by sible.
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could • Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
be seated and using the proper restraint system. over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers the vehicle to sway.
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear • Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
and use seat belts. collision.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Grocery Bag Hooks
CAUTION!
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area. Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 35 lbs
(16 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to
hook and mounting surface.
Ski Pass-Through
3
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door.
Grocery Bag Hooks
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on

the climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15
minutes. For an additional 5 minutes of operation, press
the button a second time.
Ski Pass-Through
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on 3
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .320 ▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .321 ▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .354
4
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . .322 䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .356
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .323 ▫ Driver Information Display (DID) - 7⬙
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — ▫ Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And
3.5” Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And 䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
(DID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 ▫ Manual Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 ▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect® 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN ▫ Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .397 ▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .397 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .419
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
䡵 Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 ▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .399 ▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 ▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 ▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 ▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 ▫ Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 ▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .440
▫ Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . .435 ▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 4
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Radio Screen 11 — Steering Wheel

2 — EVIC/DID Controls 7 — Passenger Air Bag 12 — Hood Release
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Glove Compartment 13 — Headlight Switch
4 — Cruise/Adaptive Cruise Control 9 — Radio Controls
5 — Ignition Switch 10 — Manual Climate Controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
1. Red EVIC/DID Telltales booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
2. Amber EVIC/DID Telltales
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
3. Brake Warning Light ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
This light monitors various brake functions, system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
including brake fluid level and parking brake indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
application. If the brake light turns on it may when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has 4
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that dropped below a specified level.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake the brake fluid level checked.
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. sary.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
WARNING!
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is tion.
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have applied it does not show the degree of brake application.
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
4. LaneSense Service — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required . 5. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by This displays the set speed of the Electronic
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the Speed Control.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Dis- 8. Turn Signal Indicators
play
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn
This will display the distance setting for the signals when the turn signal lever is operated.
ACC system. For further information, refer to A tone will chime, and an EVIC/DID message
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Under- will appear if either turn signal is left on for
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”. more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
7. Seat Belt Reminder Light NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for 4
a defective outside light bulb.
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four 9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
when the ignition switch is turned to the
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles 10. Air Bag Warning Light
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
problem diagnosed and corrected.
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
NOTE: either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
to ON/RUN. Vehicle” for further information.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the 11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
previously. trol (ESC) is off.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds 12. Tire Pressure Monitoring
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation. Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle low tire pressure telltale.
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for 4
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. approximately one minute and then remain continuously
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS 13. Antilock Brake System (ABS)
to continue to function properly.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
CAUTION! switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
The TPMS has been optimized for the original may stay on for as long as four seconds.
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
warning have been established for the tire size indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- is not functioning and that service is required. However,
tion or sensor damage may result when using re- the conventional brake system will continue to operate
placement equipment that is not of the same size, normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14. Fuel Filler Door Location 17. Engine Temperature
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the When the engine temperature gets too high, the
vehicle where the fuel door is located. temperature icon will change color from light blue
to red.
15. Fuel Gauge 18. High Beam Indicator
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. 4
16. Gear Selector Status (PRNDL/S) 19. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
• P = Park The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
• R = Reverse an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
• N = Neutral monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
• D = Drive
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
• L = Low – If Equipped does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
• S = Sport – If Equipped ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
The shift status “P,R,N,D,L/,S” are displayed indicating Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
the shifter position. Refer to “Starting And Operating”. poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
not require towing. drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
CAUTION! in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine 20. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic lights are on.
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required. 21. Stop/Start Autostop Active
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow
WARNING! button until the Stop/Start icon is highlighted
in the EVIC/DID. Press and release the
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced SELECT/RIGHT arrow button to display the
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal Stop/Start status. This telltale will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function can go into “Autostop” mode.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
22. Vehicle Security Alarm 26. Temperature Gauge
This light will flash rapidly for approximately The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
continuously after the alarm is set. The security The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
light will also come on for about three seconds when the ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
ignition is first turned on. or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
4
23. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute CAUTION!
(RPM x 1000).
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
24. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
This indicator will illuminate when the park “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
lights or headlights are turned on. with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
25. EVIC White Telltales — If Equipped turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
WARNING!
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
System Pressure Cap paragraph. that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
27. Electronic Vehicle Information Display (EVIC) and
Driver Information Display (DID) Odometer Display When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Instrument Cluster Messages for EVIC/DID.
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
hicle has been driven. Driver Information Display (DID)” for further
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of information.
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER The EVIC Main Menu items consists of the following:
(EVIC)
• Speedometer
The 3.5” Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
display is located in the instrument cluster. • Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Stop/Start — If Equipped 4
• Audio Info
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Settings
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the Main Menu items ( Speed-
ometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel Economy, Trip A,
Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio, Messages, Screen Set
Up, Settings).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu
items (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel
Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio,
Messages, Screen Set Up, Settings).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
EVIC Controls Press and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Press and release the LEFT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push 4
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
3.5” Display 1. Electronic Park Brake Failure — If Equipped
The 3.5” EVIC displays are located in the center portion This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic
of the cluster. Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized
dealer for assistance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Brake Warning Light The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
This light monitors various brake functions,
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
including brake fluid level and parking brake
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
application. If the brake light turns on it may
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
dropped below a specified level.
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the the brake fluid level checked.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
sary.
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
WARNING!
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is tion.
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
3. Engine Temperature Warning Light
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 4
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Main Display Area • Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
The main display area will normally display the main
the condition that activated the message is cleared.
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
(if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
leaves the vehicle).
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories: • Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
• Five Second Stored Messages
feature. This message type is displayed until the
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message
message takes control of the main display area for
type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
“Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as
long as the condition that activated it remains active) • Five Second Unstored Messages
and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an message takes control of the main display area for
“i” will be displayed in the EVIC’s compass/outside five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
temp line. Examples of this message type are “Right An example of this message type is “Automatic High
Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pres- Beams On”.
sure”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. LaneSense Warning — If Equipped 6. Fuel Gauge
The LaneSense Warning system provides the Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank
driver with visual and steering torque warnings when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane 7. Low Fuel Telltale
unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense Warning system is ON and When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
ready the lane lines and LaneSense Warning indica- (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
tor are the color gray. fuel is added. 4
• When the LaneSense Warning system is armed, the 8. Reconfigurable Yellow Telltale Display
lane lines change to white and the LaneSense Warn- • Forward Collision Warning Indicator
ing indicator changes to green. This telltale will turn on warn you of a
• When the LaneSense Warning system senses a lane possible collision with the vehicle in front
cross situation, the approaching lane line and the of you.
LaneSense Warning indicator change from white to
yellow. • Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Operation”
windshield washer fluid is low.
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction • Stop/Start Service Indicator
This light will turn on when a ACC is not This telltale will turn on to indicate the
operating and needs service. For further Stop/Start system is not functioning prop-
information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise erly and service is required.
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”. • Service AWD Indicator
• LaneSense Service — If Equipped This telltale will turn on to indicate the All
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not function-
LaneSense Departure has detected a ing properly and that service is required.
failure.
9. Reconfigurable White Telltale Area
• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator • Electronic Speed Control ON
This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel This light will turn on when the electronic
filler cap is loose. speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Electronic Speed Control SET 10. Reconfigurable Red Telltale Display
This light will turn on when the electronic • Oil Temperature Warning Light
speed control is SET. For further information, This telltale indicates engine oil tempera-
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un- ture is high. If the light turns on while
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set engine as soon as possible.
This light will turn on when the vehicle • Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control Equipped 4
(ACC) has reached the speed desired and If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” mes-
the set button has been selected. For further informa- sage and a steering wheel icon are dis-
tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- played on the EVIC/DID screen, it indi-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”. cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost
This light will turn on when the vehicle power steering assistance. Refer to “Power Steering”
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
(ACC) has been turned on and in the READY
state. For further information, refer to “Electronic
Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera- Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under • Oil Pressure Warning Light
these conditions there will be a substantial increase This light indicates low engine oil pressure.
in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle The light should turn on momentarily when
speeds and during parking maneuvers. the engine is started. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes
for service. when this light turns on.
• Charging System Light
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is cor-
This light shows the status of the electrical
rected. This light does not show how much oil is in
charging system. If the light stays on or comes
the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
under the hood.
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a prob- This light informs you of a problem with
lem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IM- the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) sys-
MEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer. tem. The light will come on when the
ignition is first turned ON and remain on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on • Air Bag Warning Light
during starting, have the system checked by an This light will turn on for four to eight
authorized dealer. seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while switch is first turned to the ON/RUN po-
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when sition. If the light is either not on during
the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
off. possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things 4
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
information.
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If • Door Ajar
the light is flashing when the engine is running, This light will turn on to indicate that one
immediate service is required. You may experience or more doors may be ajar.
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or en-
gine stall and your vehicle may require towing.
• Decklid Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate the deck-
lid may be ajar.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
WARNING!
This light indicates that there is excessive
transmission fluid temperature that might If you continue operating the vehicle when the
occur with severe usage such as trailer Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
towing. It may also occur when operating nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition. contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
If this light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the cause a fire.
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in
NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
11. Temperature Gauge
CAUTION! The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera- ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
severe transmission damage or transmission failure. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads System Pressure Cap paragraph.
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
Oil Change Reset
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer Oil Change Due
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 4
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho- indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
rized dealer for service. display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime
has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
WARNING! interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling style.
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) (DID)
refer to the following procedure.
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.) • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times • Service Airbag System
within 10 seconds.
• Traction Control Off
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
• Washer Fluid Low
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position. • Oil Pressure Low
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Oil Change Due
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
• Fuel Low
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Service Power Steering • Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Cruise Off • Lights On
• Cruise Ready • Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH • Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H • Turn Signal On
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to • Vehicle Not in Park 4
XX”
• Key in Ignition
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Brake Fluid Low
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Battery Voltage Low
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open • Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open • Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired • Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset • Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Service Airbag System • Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Service Airbag Warning Light • Service Transmission
• Door Open • Service Shifter
• Doors Open • Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Gear Not Available • Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
• Shift Not Allowed • Washer Fluid Low
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
EVIC Selectable Menu Items button to scroll through the information sub-menus and
Push the OK button to select or reset the following
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
resettable sub-menus:
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
EVIC. Tire Pressure
Speedometer Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push
the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the 4
and release the RIGHT arrow button to toggle following will be displayed:
between km/h and MPH and push the OK button to If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
select your speedometer display. displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
Vehicle Info ICON.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC/DID. XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
Temp will be displayed. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire Fuel Economy
Pressure System” is displayed. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted.
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return • Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or
to the main menu. L/100 km with Bargraph)
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” • Range To Empty (RTE)
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
Coolant Temperature
Trip Info
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
Only Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left
Oil Temp or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
Oil Life will display the following:
Battery Voltage • Distance

• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Hold the OK button to reset feature information. Stored Messages
Stop/Start – If Equipped Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. This
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
the Stop/Start message is displayed in the EVIC/DID.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
Push and release the OK button to display the Stop/Start
what the stored messages are.
status.
Screen Setup 4
Audio
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push
the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC/DID.
and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what informa-
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
location that information is displayed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Settings (EVIC)
Settings Translation Message Submenu

1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French
2 Units Select Units U.S., Metric
3 FCW Sensitivity FCW Sensitivity Off, Near, Far
4 ParkSense ParkSense Off, Sound Only, Sound & Display
5 Blind Spot Alert Blind Spot Alert Off, Lights Only, Lights & Chime
6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Asst On, Off
7 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On, Off
8 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On, Off
9 Passive Entry Passive Entry On, Off
10 Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock Driver Door, All Doors
11 Key Fob Linked to Memory Key in Memory On, Off
12 Remote Start Comfort Rmt Start Comfort On, Off
System
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

13 Sound Horn with Remote Horn w/ Rmt Start On, Off
Start
14 Sound Horn with Remote Horn w/ Rmt Lock On, Off
Lock
15 Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On, Off
16 Daytime Running Lights Daytime Lights On, Off 4
17 Automatic Highbeams Auto Highbeams On, Off
18 Headlights On with Wipers Lights w/ Wipers On, Off
19 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On, Off
20 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90
seconds
21 Key-Off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off, 45 seconds, 5 minutes, 10
minutes
22 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90
seconds
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

23 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On, Off
24 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On, Off
25 Compass variance Compass Var See Owner’s Manual, X Increment
26 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Press > to calibrate the compass
27 Brake Service Brake Service Follow the VF specifically for this
one
28 Auto Park Brake Auto Park Brake On, Off
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items • Range To Empty (RTE)
1. Upper Left • Average MPG
• None • Current MPG
• Compass (default) 2. Upper Right
• Outside Temp • None
• Time • Compass
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Outside Temp (default) • Average MPG
• Time • Current MPG
• Range To Empty (RTE) • Trip A
• Average MPG • Trip B
• Current MPG • Audio Information
NOTE: defaults will change to Average MPG UR, Range • Menu Title (Default Setting) 4
UL if the proxies for Compass and Outside Temp are not
• Digital Speedo
available
4. Current Gear
3. Center
• On
• None
• Off (Default)
• Compass
5. Defaults (defaults: Compass UR, Outside Temp UL,
• Outside Temp Center Menu Title, Gear Display Off)
• Time • Restore
• Range To Empty
• Cancel
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) The DID Main Menu items consists of the following:
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver- • Speedometer
interactive display that is located in the instrument
• Vehicle Info
cluster.
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Stop/Start — If Equipped
• Audio Info
• Messages
• Screen Setup
Driver Information Display (DID)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver As-
sist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Stop/Start Info,
Audio, Messages, Screen Setup).
• DOWN Arrow Button 4
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver
Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Stop/Start
Info, Audio, Messages, Screen Setup).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
DID Controls Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button Driver Information Display (DID) - 7ⴖ Display
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to The 7” DID displays are located in the center portion of
access the information screens or sub-menu the cluster.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the information
screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. push
and hold the OK arrow button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Driver Information Display (DID) Display
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1. Red Reconfigurable Telltale Display • Door Ajar
• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If This light will turn on to indicate that one
Equipped or more doors may be ajar.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” mes-
sage and a steering wheel icon are dis-
played on the EVIC/DID screen, it indi- • Decklid Ajar
cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to This light will turn on to indicate the deck-
lid may be ajar.
the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost 4
power steering assistance. Refer to “Power Steering”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information. • Oil Pressure Warning Light
NOTE: This light indicates low engine oil pressure.
The light should turn on momentarily when
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera-
the engine is started. If the light turns on while
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
these conditions there will be a substantial increase
soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes
in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle
when this light turns on.
speeds and during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer
for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is cor- • Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
rected. This light does not show how much oil is in This light informs you of a problem with
the engine. The engine oil level must be checked the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) sys-
under the hood. tem. The light will come on when the
• Charging System Light ignition is first turned ON and remain on
This light shows the status of the electrical briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
charging system. If the light stays on or comes during starting, have the system checked by an
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s authorized dealer.
non-essential electrical devices or increase engine If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when
on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a prob- the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever
lem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IM- is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn
MEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer. off.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. You may experience
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or en- • Transmission Temperature Warning Light
gine stall and your vehicle may require towing. This light indicates that there is excessive
• Oil Temperature Warning Light transmission fluid temperature that might
This telltale indicates engine oil tempera- occur with severe usage such as trailer
ture is high. If the light turns on while towing. It may also occur when operating
driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition.
engine as soon as possible. If this light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
• Air Bag Warning Light engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in 4
This light will turn on for four to eight NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON/RUN po- CAUTION!
sition. If the light is either not on during Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Amber Reconfigurable Telltale Display
WARNING!
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
If you continue operating the vehicle when the This telltale will turn on to indicate the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi- windshield washer fluid is low.
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire. • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further
2. Reconfigurable Info Area information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
• Compass Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
• Outside Temp Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Time • LaneSense Service — If Equipped
• Range This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
Lane Sense Departure has detected a
• Average MPG
failure.
• Current MPG
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Indicator 4. Brake Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the fuel
This light monitors various brake functions,
filler cap is loose.
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
• Stop/Start Service Indicator indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
This telltale will turn on to indicate the the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
Stop/Start system is not functioning prop- the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
erly and service is required.
4
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
• Service AWD Indicator master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not function- Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
ing properly and that service is required. System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
• Forward Collision Warning Indicator
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
This telltale will turn on warn you of a
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
WARNING!
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
dropped below a specified level. a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
the brake fluid level checked. Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
sary. turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an
tion. “i” will be displayed in the middle of the DID’s top
line. Examples of this message type are “Right Front
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure”.
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
• Unstored Messages
5. Driver Information Display (DID) This message type is displayed indefinitely or until
The main display area will normally display the main the condition that activated the message is cleared. 4
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On”
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up” (if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn- leaves the vehicle).
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall • Unstored Messages Until RUN
into several categories: These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
• Five Second Stored Messages feature. This message type is displayed until the
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message
message takes control of the main display area for type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as
long as the condition that activated it remains active)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Five Second Unstored Messages • When the LaneSense Warning system is ON and
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of ready the lane lines and LaneSense Warning indica-
message takes control of the main display area for tor are the color gray.
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. • When the LaneSense Warning system is armed, the
An example of this message type is “Automatic High lane lines change to white and the LaneSense Warn-
Beams On”. ing indicator changes to green.
6. Electronic Park Brake Failure • When the LaneSense Warning system senses a lane
cross situation, the approaching lane line and the
This telltale indicates that there is an Electronic LaneSense Warning indicator change from white to
Park Brake Fault. Please see your authorized yellow.
dealer for assistance.
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Operation”
7. LaneSense Warning — If Equipped in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
The LaneSense Warning system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque warnings
when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane
unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8. Reconfigurable Info Area • Electronic Speed Control SET
• Compass This light will turn on when the electronic
• Outside Temp speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
• Time
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Range
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting
• Average MPG Display
• Current MPG This will display the distance setting for the 4
9. Speed For Electronic Cruise Control Setting ACC system. For further information, refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Un-
This displays the set speed of the Electronic derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Speed Control.
11. Sub Menu Text
• Individual Tire Pressure Monitor
10. Dedicated Cruise Control Telltales
• Coolant Temp
• Electronic Speed Control ON
• Transmission Temperature
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information, • Oil Temperature
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un- • Oil Life
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. • Battery Voltage
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12. Low Fuel Display odometer reading before the repair/service, so that
you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the
This area will display text to the visual warn-
door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be
ings (i.e., “Push Brake To Start”).
reset at zero.
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
Odometer Display/Fuel Gauge/Temperature Gauge/ shows the DID messages and Submenus.
Submenu Area • Fuel Gauge
• The odometer display shows the total distance the Fuel Gauge displays the level of fuel in the fuel tank
vehicle has been driven. when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of • Temperature Gauge
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the cates that the engine cooling system is operating
repair technician should leave the odometer reading satisfactorily.
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
is a good idea for you to make a record of the operating range.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads System Pressure Cap paragraph.
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer 13. Gear Selector Status (PRNDL/S)
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,/S” are displayed indi- 4
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho- cating the shifter lever position. Refer to “Starting And
rized dealer for service. Operating”.
• P = Park
WARNING! • R = Reverse
• N = Neutral
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling • D = Drive
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer • L = Low – If Equipped
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to • S = Sport – If Equipped
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14. Engine Temperature Display release the OK button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
When the engine temperature gets too high, the
refer to the following procedure.
temperature icon will change color from light blue
to red. 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
Oil Change Reset
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
Oil Change Due
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty OFF/LOCK position.
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
style. reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instrument Cluster Messages For (EVIC) And • Service Power Steering
(DID)
• Cruise Off
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Cruise Ready
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H
• Service Airbag System 4
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
• Traction Control Off XX”
• Washer Fluid Low • Service Tire Pressure System
• Oil Pressure Low • Parking Brake Engaged
• Oil Change Due • Brake Fluid Low
• Fuel Low • Service Electronic Braking System
• Service Antilock Brake System • Engine Temperature Hot
• Service Electronic Throttle Control • Battery Voltage Low
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Service Electronic Throttle Control • Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Lights On • Remote Start Aborted Tailgate Open
• Right Turn Signal Light Out • Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Left Turn Signal Light Out • Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Turn Signal On • Service Airbag System
• Vehicle Not in Park • Service Airbag Warning Light
• Key in Ignition • Door Open
• Key in Ignition Lights On • Doors Open
• Remote Start Active Key to Run • Gear Not Available
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button • Shift Not Allowed
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low • Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold • Autostick Unavailable Service Required
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open • Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake EVIC Selectable Menu Items
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive EVIC.
• Service Transmission Speedometer
• Service Shifter Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push 4
and release the RIGHT arrow button to toggle
• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On between km/h and MPH and push the OK button to
• Washer Fluid Low select your speedometer display.
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the Vehicle Info
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
middle, and red telltales on the left. the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC/DID.
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and Coolant
Temp will be displayed. Push the LEFT or RIGHT arrow
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
button to scroll through the information sub-menus and If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
Push the OK button to select or reset the following Pressure System” is displayed.
resettable sub-menus:
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
Tire Pressure reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return
to the main menu.
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC/DID. Push Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
and release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
following will be displayed:
Coolant Temperature
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
Only
ICON.
Oil Temp
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the tire Oil Life
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
Battery Voltage
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
color than the other tire pressure value.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
information displayed depends on ACC system status. ACC SET
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of instrument cluster.
the following displays in the DID:
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
Adaptive Cruise Control Off activity occurs, which may include any of the following: 4
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap- • Distance Setting Change
tive Cruise Control Off.”
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise • System Off
Control Ready.” • ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• The DID will return to the last display selected after • Range To Empty (RTE)
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
• Current Fuel Economy (MPG or L/100 km)
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con-
Trip Info
trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”. Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC (Toggle left
LaneSense Menu
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings. will display the following:
The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys-
• Distance
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” • Average Fuel Economy
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Elapsed Time
Fuel Economy
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted.
• Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG or
L/100 km with Bargraph)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Stop/Start – If Equipped Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Stop/Start message is displayed in the EVIC/DID. the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Push
Push and release the OK button to display the Stop/Start and release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The
status. Screen Setup feature allows you to change what informa-
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
Audio
location that information is displayed.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until 4
the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. Uconnect® SETTINGS
Stored Messages The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC/DID. This access and change the customer programmable features.
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
what the stored messages are.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On Uconnect® 8.4 Buttons On Touchscreen
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons are located below the Uconnect® system in the Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Uconnect® display.
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Settings — Uconnect® 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN Settings
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the Uconnect® 5.0 — If a SETTINGS button on the faceplate
control knob one or more times to select or change a exists, push this button. If not, push the MORE button on 4
setting (i.e., ON, OFF). the faceplate and press the ⬙Settings⬙ button on the
touchscreen. The remaining settings are defined for the
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN — Press the “Apps” button on
Back buttons located below the system.
the touchscreen, then press the “Settings” button on the
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect® touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this
screen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access pro-
the screen on. grammable features that may be equipped such as Dis-
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain play, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance (if
option on the Uconnect® system. equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
equipped), Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/ Display
Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Per- After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
sonal Data (if equipped). the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time. • Display Mode
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the This feature allows you to select one of the auto display
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option, settings. To change Mode status, press and release the
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen. Then press
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has the back arrow button on the touchscreen or push the
been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press back button on the faceplate.
the back arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back
button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or • Display Brightness With Headlights On
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of This feature allows you to select the display brightness
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness with
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen. Then
toggle up or down through the list of available settings. press the back arrow button on the touchscreen, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Display Brightness With the Headlights Off • Units
This feature allows you to select the display brightness This feature allows you to select US or Metric units of
when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness with measure in the EVIC/DID, odometer, and navigation
the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen. Then system (if equipped). Press “US” or “Metric” until a
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen, or push check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
the back button on the faceplate. setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
• Set Language 4
the back button on the faceplate.
This feature allows you to select one of the languages for
• Touchscreen Beep
all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the sound
Language” button on the touchscreen and then press the heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press the
desired language button on the touchscreen until a “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate. the back button on the faceplate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu or push the back button on the faceplate.
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the driver screen/EVIC/DID/Cluster dis- Clock
play as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
a programmed route. To turn on or enable, press the following settings will be available:
“Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the • Sync Time With GPS
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
This feature allows you to automatically have the radio
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen until a
• Voice check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
This feature allows you to change the Voice Response the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, the back button on the faceplate.
press the “Brief” (Brief is a shortened response for
advanced users) or “Detailed” (Detailed provides more • Set Time Hours
comprehensive responses for new users) button on the This feature allows you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to the previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
return to the previous menu or press the ”X” button on • Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
This feature allows you to choose to show the time in the
• Set Time Minutes
Status bar. To change the Time in Status Bar setting, press
This feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync the “Show Time in Status Bar” button on the touchscreen
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing 4
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
Safety & Driving Assistance
return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
• Time Format
able:
This feature allows you to select the time format display • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Sensitivity — If
setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the touch- Equipped
screen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or
24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected. The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving active at 5 mph (8 km/h) and is only enabled when FCW
experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a is on.
possible collision when you are much closer to the
For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press
Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
and release the “Near” or “Far” button. Then press the
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
back arrow button on the touchscreen, or push the back
button on the faceplate. • LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
Vehicle”. lane departures. The LaneSense Warning can be set to
provide either an “early”, “medium” or “late” warning
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
zone start point.
If Equipped
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn-
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
Vehicle”.
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
information.
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can • Front ParkSense® Volume — If Equipped
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane Front ParkSense® volume settings can be selected from
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.” the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and 4
(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”. “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
• ParkSense® — If Equipped • Rear ParkSense® Volume — If Equipped
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the Rear ParkSense® volume settings can be selected from
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System (if equipped). The
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and “HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-
lease the checkbox for “Sound” or “Sound and Display.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Rear ParkSense® Braking Assist — If Equipped appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
When this feature is selected, the ParkSense® system will
to return to the previous menu.
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only en- • Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
abled when ParkSense® is also on). When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Refer to “ParkSense® Rear Braking Assist” in “Under- can be set to Off, Lights Only or Lights and Chime. The
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system func- Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights
tion and operating information. category. When this category is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
visual alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir- category is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE- audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is
VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the
REVERSE. To enable or turn on, press the “Tilt Mirrors In “Off,” “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the
Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen, or push the back button on the faceplate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in • ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView®
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
in the BSM not operating to specification. • Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines — If When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
Equipped cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture 4
When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines on the windshield and the wipers are set to an intermit-
are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to tent position. To make your selection, press the “Rain
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. to return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines — If • Electric Park Brake Service Mode — If Equipped
Equipped This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system, to
overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate command the electric park brake retraction, to service the
the width of the vehicle. rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.” seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
• Auto Park Brake
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
Auto Park Brake will set the park brake once the vehicle menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
is set in park (or at key off for a manual transmission)
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
• Hill Start Assist
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
This setting will hold the brake if the driver is on a hill and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
and takes their foot off the brake to accelerate. are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
Lights
press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the
following settings will be available. touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
• Headlights Off Delay back button on the faceplate.
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of • Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are • Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch-
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
cating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. 4
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights • Flash Lights With Lock
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the passive
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or without
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch- the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your
screen to return to the previous menu, or push the back selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button on the
button on the faceplate. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
Doors & Locks
• Flash Lights With Lock
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available: When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
• Auto Door Locks when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
The Auto Door Lock feature can be enabled, or disabled, passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
by your authorized dealer. Please visit your local autho- or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
rized Chrysler dealer for further information. make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
• Auto Unlock On Exit button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is on the faceplate.
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark • Sound Horn With Remote
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated via the key fob. To make your
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
on the faceplate. RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter which 4
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the
remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press
“Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the touch- Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
that setting has been selected. Select one of three options to grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob
sound the horn, Off, 1st Press, or 2nd Press. Press the back Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door
is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Passive Entry NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, for further information.
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, one of the following settings will be avail-
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If
able:
Equipped
• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat OR Auto-On Driver
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to Heated Seat & Steering wheel OR Auto-On Driver
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the Heated/Vented Seat OR Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory Seat & Steering Wheel
Linked To FOB” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting When this feature is selected the driver’s heated/vented
has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tem- appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
peratures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
will turn on. To make your selection, press “Off,” “Remote to return to the previous menu.
Start Only,” OR “All Starts” checkbox until a check-mark • Engine Off Power Delay
appears next to the setting option. Select “Off,” “Remote
Start Only” OR “All Starts” to determine when the feature When this feature is selected, the power window
is activated. Press the back arrow button on the touch- switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
screen to return to the previous menu. DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if 4
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
Engine Off Options 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
touchscreen the following settings will be available: Engine Off Power Delay status, press the “0 seconds,”
• Easy Exit Seat “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to touchscreen.
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
• Headlight Off Delay
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit
Seats” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating touchscreen.
that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
directly on the desired setting.
Audio • Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
following settings will be available.
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
• Balance/Fade press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
settings. Press and drag the ’C’ icon, use the arrows to • Surround Sound — If Equipped
adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
• Equalizer To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed
settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• AUX Volume Match SiriusXM Setup
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level After pressing the SIRIUS Setup button on the touch-
for portable devices connected through the AUX input. screen the following settings will be available.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match • Channel Skip
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
touchscreen. channels that are the most desirable to listen to, or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selec- 4
Phone/Bluetooth® tion, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen,
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the select the channels you would like to skip followed by
touchscreen the following settings will be available: pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
• Paired Devices • Subscription Information
This feature shows which phones are paired to the New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer limited time subscription to SiriusXM™ Satellite Radio
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual. with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to re-
subscribe.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the settings
access the Subscription Information screen. are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to
default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on Clear Personal Data
the screen or visit the provider online. After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a separate subscription on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-
and is available for U.S. residents only. able:
• Clear Personal Data
Restore Settings When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To Clear Per-
touchscreen the following settings will be available: sonal Data press the “Yes” or “No” button on the
touchscreen. A check mark will appear in the box when
• Restore Settings
selected. Then press the back arrow button on the touch-
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, screen.
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

Located in the front storage area of the center console,
this feature allows an iPod®/MP3 player, or an external
USB device, to be connected to the audio system. 4
USB/AUX Ports
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Port
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®

and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s
Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering

Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch Media Mode
between the various audio modes available (AM/FM/ Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
SXM/AUX, etc.). track on the selected media (Disc, AUX, Bluetooth®).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the
control is different depending on which audio mode you previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
are in. current track begins to play.
4
The following describes the left-hand control operation If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
while in mode. second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
Radio Operation RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
The button located in the center of the left-hand control by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
grammed in the radio preset button. not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be CLIMATE CONTROLS
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
not using Uconnect® (if equipped). make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
General Information system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system dis-
play.
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions: When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Ra-
dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
the party responsible for compliance could void the
display.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Manual Climate Controls
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
• This device must accept any interference received, system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
including interference that may cause undesired op- dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
eration. be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use

this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position. 4
Temperature Control
Manual Climate Controls Use this control to regulate the tem-

perature of the air inside the passenger
1 — RECIRCULATION Control 5 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
2 — Front Blower Control 6 — REAR DEFROST Mode
3 — MAX Air Conditioning 7 — MODE Control terclockwise, from top center into the
(A/C) blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
4 — Temperature Control temperatures. Rotating the knob clock-
wise, into the red area, indicates
warmer temperatures.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Air Conditioning Operation Mode Control (Air Direction)
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning
(A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is Mode control allows you to choose
engaged. from several patterns of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
MAX A/C
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the a blend of two of these modes. The
A/C is turned on automatically and the air is closer the control is to a particular
recirculated. mode, the more air distribution you
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C receive from that mode.
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C Panel Mode
button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance
seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accu-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
mulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water
airflow.
spray from behind the radiator and through the con-
denser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow
to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Bi-Level Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer 4
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved Defrost Mode
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
small amount through the defrost and side win-
dow demist outlets. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C
button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
modes only when necessary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Recirculation Control of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the outside air position.
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use ing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C
the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any out- button.
side odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
Air Outlets
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
NOTE:
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
• If the RECIRCULATION button is pushed when airflow.
the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
seat passengers.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
Economy Mode
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended. If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem- Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Equipped
Floor modes. Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate
Stop/Start System — If Equipped The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may Uconnect® screen.
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an 4
engine running condition.
Uconnect® Manual Climate Controls — Buttons On The

Faceplate
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Manual Temperature Controls —

Buttons On The Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
Uconnect® 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen 1. MAX A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
2. A/C Button temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting and defogging. If the front defrost mode
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi- is turned off the climate system will return the previous
nates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again setting.
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
5. Rear Defrost Button
and the A/C indicator will turn off. 4
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
3. Recirculation Button
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi- tor will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
nates when ON. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
4. Front Defrost Button 10 minutes. For each additional press of this button, five
additional minutes will be added to the timer function.
Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6. Blower Control
CAUTION!
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
speeds can be selected using either buttons on the
faceplate or buttons on the touchscreens as follows:
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after Knob On The Faceplate
soaking with warm water. The blower speed increases as you turn the control
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
window cleaners on the interior surface of the speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Buttons On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7. Modes NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
warmer air from the floor outlets.
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are • Floor Mode
as follows: Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
• Panel Mode of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets. 4
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to • Mix Mode
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
snowy conditions.
located adjacent to the air vanes to shut off or adjust the
amount of airflow from these outlets. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
• Bi-Level Mode
pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed when necessary.
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8. Climate Control OFF Button 11. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0)
Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF. Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect® 8.4) regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
Provides temperature control. Press the button on the area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem-
faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touch- perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera-
screen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen tures.
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
Provides temperature control. Press the button on the
faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the
touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touch-
screen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on
the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen — Buttons On Your Uconnect® Touchscreen
If Equipped Buttons on your touchscreen are accessible on the
Buttons On Your Uconnect® Faceplate Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On Uconnect® 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Your Faceplate Buttons On Your Touchscreen
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
nates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
nates when ON.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
4. AUTO Operation Button
Buttons On Your Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen) adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
1. MAX A/C Button
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi- Operation” for more information.
nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. Front Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower • Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side win-
dow defrosting and defogging. Performing this function
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the 4
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the
soaking with warm water.
front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
return the previous setting.
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
6. Rear Defrost Button window.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster (if • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
(Uconnect® 8.4) towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and automatically exit Sync.
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar 9. SYNC
towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings. Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
automatically exit Sync. the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
(Uconnect® 8.4) setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10. Blower Control 11. Modes
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
forced through the climate system. There are seven comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The as follows:
speeds can be selected using either the knob on your • Panel Mode
faceplate or the buttons on your touchscreen as follows:
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument 4
Knob On Your Faceplate
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
The blower speed increases as you turn the knob clock- adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
wise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise. down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
Buttons On Your Touchscreen is a shut off wheel located adjacent to the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting outlets.
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Bi-Level Mode 12. Climate Control OFF Button
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed 13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
through the defrost and side window demister outlets. (Uconnect® 8.4)
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and trol. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-
warmer air from the floor outlets. ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
• Floor Mode button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler tempera-
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
ture settings.
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets. NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
• Mix Mode adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect® 8.4)
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer tem-
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
temperature settings. the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
time.
NOTE:
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 5.0) 4
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
needed.
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem- • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera- expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
tures. cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
Climate Control Functions
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
A/C (Air Conditioning) front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAX A/C recirculation LED will illuminate the button on your
touchscreen and the button on your faceplate when either
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
button is selected. Push either button on your touch-
mance.
screen or button on your faceplate a second time to turn
Press to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air
The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX into the vehicle.
A/C is ON.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
adjusted to desired user settings. Pushing other settings feature may be unavailable (recirculation button on
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could
selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit. create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On
systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation
Recirculation Control
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or matically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in
you may wish to recirculate interior air by the control button to blink and then turn off.
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) NOTE:
Automatic Operation • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
1. Push the AUTO button on your faceplate or the button
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
on your touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature
comfort as quickly as possible.
Control (ATC) Panel.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable 4
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once
this section of the manual.
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically. Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by Summer Operation
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at The engine cooling system must be protected with a
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode. OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) is recommended.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually Winter Operation
selected in Manual operation.
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
temperature control will continue to operate automati- tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
cally. Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
Operating Tips coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for may cause window fogging.
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vacation/Storage NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure Outside Air Intake
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves 4
Window Fogging collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear is clear of ice, slush and snow.
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase A/C Air Filter
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
The climate control system filters outside air containing
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
occur.
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
tions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
or 8.4A/8.4AN system.
4
Uconnect® 5.0
Key Features:
• 5” touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
Uconnect® 8.4AN facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect® 8.4A system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect® Voice Command

1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen. Uconnect® 5.0
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Sub-
scription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial
required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM 4
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
and say “Help.” The system will provide you
with a list of commands.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Uconnect® 5.0 Radio Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Media TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to 4
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect® 5.0 Media
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illumi-
nated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the
Phone button and say “Call,” then pronounce the
name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When
a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
Uconnect® 5.0 Phone
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Voice Text Reply PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push I’ll call you I need See you in
the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have com- later. directions. <number> of
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.) I’m on my way. Can’t talk right minutes.
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push I’m lost. now. Thanks.
the Phone button . After the beep, say: “Reply”
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
system prompts. UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
Start without Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-
No. I’ll be Late. free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
me.
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
control.)
Are you there ber> minutes
Call me. late.
yet?
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
following commands:
• Set temperature to 70 degrees
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to 4
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After
the beep, say:
• For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.” Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button .
After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) Stolen Vehicle Assistance
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take Remote Vehicle Start**
advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next Remote Horn and Lights
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get Yelp® Search
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found Voice Texting
on the next page.
Roadside Assistance Call 4
*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped ve-
hicles purchased within the continental United States and Wi-Fi Hotspot***
Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is **If vehicle is equipped.
available; see coverage map for details. ***Extra charges apply.
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch
touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Regis-
tration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect® Access. Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and

complete the easy online registration process to create
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do is:
Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the 1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually your Mopar® Owner Connect account at
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with MoparOwnerConnect.com
factory-installed Remote Start.)
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
number to receive a link to download the App on your 4
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is
then connected to your mobile device.
Mobile App
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) TIP:
1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After • Not compatible with iPhone®.
the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
sage to John Smith”
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
illuminated to use the feature.
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
to process your message. Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or your voice to search for the most popular places or things
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect® around you.
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy 1. Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen.
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
2. Press the “All Apps” button on the touchscreen.
You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your
voice to send a personalized text message.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touch-
screen, push the VR button , then say: “YELP
search.”
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect® to find. 4
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp®
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
SiriusXM Travel Link™
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-
mand.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Additional Information Uconnect® System Support:
© 2014 Chrysler Group LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar • U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of Chrysler Group LLC. • Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all 1-800-387-9983 (French)
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET 4
are registered trademarks of Yelp.
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
DriveUconnect.com
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
DriveUconnect.ca Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
you call.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 ▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
AUTOSTOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode . .453
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or
−29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 ▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System . .455 5
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 ▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System . .455
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 ▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .456
䡵 STOP/START SYSTEM — 2.4L ENGINE . . . . . . .451 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .459 䡵 ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .460 ▫ Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 ▫ Safehold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
䡵 PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .468 ▫ Brake Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .470 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .482
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .471 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 ▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .485
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 ▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491 ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 5
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .499
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .516
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .504
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .518
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .519
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .507
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .526
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 ▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .532
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .545 ▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
WARNING! Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key mode. A child could operate power windows, other
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. controls, or move the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
access to an unlocked vehicle.
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
driving range.
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- Normal Starting
dren should be warned not to touch the parking NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
(Continued)
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the Extended Park Starting
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
Tip Start Feature
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself 2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the when the engine starts.
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this 3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the 5
occurs, cycle the ignition switch to the LOCK position, ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
procedure. Extended Park Starting procedure.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) 4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail- the procedure.
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
If Engine Fails To Start engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
WARNING! • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
serious personal injury. cies” for further information.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
With Tip Start After Starting
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
⬙Normal Starting⬙, “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ and ⬙Ex- decrease as the engine warms up.
tended Park Starting⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To
clear any excess fuel, press the accelerator pedal all the STOP/START SYSTEM — 2.4L ENGINE
way to the floor and hold it. Then, cycle the ignition The Stop/Start function is developed to save fuel and
switch to the START position and release it as soon as the reduce emissions. The system will stop the engine auto-
starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions
matically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the
accelerator pedal, cycle the ignition to the LOCK posi- accelerator pedal on an automatic transmission will start
5
tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal the engine.
Starting” procedure.
Automatic Mode
CAUTION! The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/START
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle
seconds before trying again. speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to
conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START AU- the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
TOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode. indicating you are in Autostop. While in Autostop, the
Climate Controls system may automatically adjust airflow
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must
to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will be
Occur:
maintained upon return to an engine running condition.
• The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
STOP/START READY message will be displayed in
AUTOSTOP
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/ Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
Start section. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further system may be viewed in the EVIC/DID Stop/Start Screen.
information. In the following situations the engine will not stop:
• The vehicle must be completely stopped. • Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• The shifter must be in DRIVE or NEUTRAL and the • Driver’s door is not closed.
brake pedal depressed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold. Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• The vehicle is on a steep grade. • Fuel level.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept- • Accelerator pedal input.
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
• Engine temp too high.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
speed.
times without the STOP/START system going into a
• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature. STOP/START READY state under more extreme condi-
• Battery charge is low.
tions of the items listed above. 5
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
• The transmission is not in DRIVE or NEUTRAL.
While in DRIVE, the engine will start when the brake
• Hood is open. pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The
• HVAC set to MAX A/C. transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine
restart. During this transition the brakes will hold the
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure. vehicle to avoid undesired vehicle movement.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto- Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric
matically While In Autostop Mode: Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE to • The driver door is open and brake pedal released.
REVERSE.
• The driver door is open and the driver seat belt is
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort. unbuckled.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode. • The engine hood has been opened.
• Battery voltage drops too low. • A STOP/START system error occurs.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the engine off,
applications). the engine may require a manual restart and the electric
park brake may require a manual release (depress brake
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed. pedal and press Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to
• The emissions system requires it. “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
• A STOP/START system error occurs. Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Infor-
mation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your In-
1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the
strument Panel” for further information.
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/
START system) the engine will not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an
ON condition every time the key is turned off and
back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System 5
Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the
STOP/START OFF Switch system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis- The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
play (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
for further information. below to properly use the engine block heater:
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message ap- 1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driv-
pears in the EVIC/DID, have the system checked by your er’s side headlamp).
authorized dealer.
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED place.
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits 3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
quicker starts in cold weather. a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet 4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
driver’s side headlamp.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
CAUTION!
are available from your authorized MOPAR® dealer. Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and ing precautions are not observed:
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element. • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
engine. speed.
5
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
WARNING! is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re- running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
someone or something. Only shift into gear when turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the engine is idling normally and your foot is the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
firmly pressing the brake pedal. sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
(Continued) • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Key Ignition Park Interlock
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
number of reasons. A child or others could be avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
or the transmission gear selector. the OFF position.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System 5
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
A child could operate power windows, other con- Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
trols, or move the vehicle. selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
shifting out of PARK. pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
gear selector located on the center console. The transmis-
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
sion gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
gear selector and in the Electronic Vehicle Information
hundred miles (kilometers).
Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID).
To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
Push down on the gear selector and then rotate it, to accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
access the L or S position. You must also press the brake Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift shifting between these gears.
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the Standard Shifter
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this sec- The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, RE-
tion). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as VERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions.
PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the Using the LOW position manually downshifts the trans-
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal mission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.
driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Premium Shifter with Shift Paddles
The premium transmission gear selector (with manual
shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel) provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift
positions. Manual shifts can be made using the shift
paddles (refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section).
Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or
SPORT position will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. 5
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for Shift Lever
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position Gear Ranges
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
be completed.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
PARK (P)
WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
vehicle in this range. ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
brake. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau- your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the number of reasons. A child or others could be
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis- or the transmission gear selector.
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or 5
against unwanted movement. in a location accessible to children), and do not
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob A child could operate power windows, other con-
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. trols, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
REVERSE (R)
CAUTION!
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the stop.
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result. NEUTRAL (N)
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this periods with the engine running. The engine may be
can damage the drivetrain. started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
The following indicator should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
WARNING!
tion:
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
gear position display and verify that it indicates the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
PARK position. practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
winds), use the shift paddles (if equipped, refer to
CAUTION!
⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section for further informa-
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other tion) or the LOW range (if equipped) to select a lower
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational will improve performance and extend transmission life
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” If the transmission operating temperature exceeds nor-
for further information. mal operating limits, the transmission controller may
DRIVE (D) modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine
torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter 5
This range should be used for most city and highway clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down- damage due to overheating.
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙Transmis-
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- sion Temperature Warning Light⬙ will illuminate, a warn-
tics under all normal operating conditions. ing message will appear in the EVIC/DID and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmis-
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as sion cools down.
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may LOW (L) — IF EQUIPPED
be modified depending on engine and transmission Use this range for engine braking when descending very
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im- steep grades. In this range, the transmission will down-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to shift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are fully clockwise.
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). Transmission Limp Home Mode
Normal operation will resume once the transmission Transmission function is monitored electronically for
temperature has risen to a suitable level. abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
SPORT (S) — IF EQUIPPED result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are in-
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi-
creased to make full use of available engine power. To
nated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be
access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector and
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
rotate it fully clockwise.
aging the transmission.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
following steps: earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
1. Stop the vehicle.
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, dealer service is required.
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
Torque Converter Clutch
3. Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
turns OFF. included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. 5
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
5. Restart the engine. different feeling or response during normal operation in
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until Operation
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
will operate automatically, shifting between the nine
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may available gears. To activate Paddle Shift mode, simply tap
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly whenone of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-)
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. Tapping (-) to enter
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the
warm. next lower gear, while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift
PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED mode will retain the current gear. When Paddle Shift is
active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the
Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission instrument cluster.
feature providing manual shift control, giving you more
control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maxi- In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or
mize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving and many other situations.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another (to prevent engine lugging) and will display the cur-
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described rent gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow
below. starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should
manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
• If Paddle Shift is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
accelerates.
transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-
mum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
automatic operation.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
• If Paddle Shift is engaged while in SPORT mode, the of a vehicle speed. 5
transmission will remain in the selected gear even
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
when maximum engine speed is reached (except the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
transmission will upshift automatically from 1st to 2nd
speed.
gear at wide open throttle, if necessary). Otherwise,
the transmission will upshift only when commanded • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
by the driver. Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
• In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop fault or overheat condition is detected.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To disengage Paddle Shift mode, press and hold the (+) conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again indicated in If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of Paddle automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
Shift mode at any time without taking your foot off the wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
accelerator pedal. rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
WARNING! input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their launch and performance characteristics.
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury. CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Traction
Acceleration When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
be observed:
the front (driving) wheels.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
WARNING! slushy. 5
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the 3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle become visible.
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction 4. Keep tires properly inflated.
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. and Warnings before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

• Always check the depth of the standing water • Driving through standing water may cause damage
before driving through it. Never drive through to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
• Determine the condition of the road or the path fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in driving through standing water. Do not continue to
the way before driving through the standing water. operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving nated, as this may result in further damage. Such 5
through standing water. This will minimize wave damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
effects. Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
(Continued) cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
POWER STEERING If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
The electric power steering system will give you good ⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indi-
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
the electric steering system experiences a fault that service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
manually. standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFOR-
WARNING! MANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
obtained as soon as possible. caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under- The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
NOTE:
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial • Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake fea-
during parking maneuvers.
ture in the customer programmable features section of
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for the Uconnect® settings. 5
service.
The parking brake switch is located in the center console.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Parking Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
on the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake,
you may notice a small amount of brake pedal move-
ment. The parking brake can be applied even when the
ignition switch if OFF, however, it can only be released
when the ignition switch in the RUN position.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish
upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmis-
Electric Parking Brake Switch sion is placed into PARK. Once the park brake is en-
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the gaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illumi-
sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking nate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a
brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged, small amount of brake pedal movement while the park-
the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and ing brake is engaging.
an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The parking brake will release automatically when the NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
ignition is cycled to the RUN position, the transmission is
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
in DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the
and an attempt is made to drive away by pressing the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
accelerator pedal. otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha-
nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
PARK. The parking brake should always be applied
switch must be in the RUN position. Push on the brake
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
pedal, then push the parking brake switch down momen-
tarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the
back of the car while the parking brake disengages. You
WARNING! 5
may also notice a small amount of movement in the brake • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged, The parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish. ment and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with • Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
number of reasons. A child or others could be PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be and cause damage or injury.
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal • Driving the vehicle with the parking brake en-
or the transmission gear selector. gaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
in a location accessible to children), and do not system.
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other con- CAUTION!
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
failure and a collision. tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to Auto Park Brake
engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion, The electric park brake can be programmed to be applied
maintain upward pressure on the electric parking brake automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated through the customer programmable features section of
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion. the Uconnect® Settings.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in Any single auto park brake application can be bypassed
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a by pressing the EPB switch to the release position while
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle 5
the transmission is placed in PARK. This bypass can be
reaches approximately 3 mph, the parking brake will reset by cycling the ignition off and back on again, or by
remain engaged. driving the vehicle up to at least 12 mph (20Km/h), or by
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric going to the personal setting menu and turning the Auto
Parking Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will Park Brake function OFF and then back ON again.
illuminate. This may be accompanied by the BRAKE
warning lamp flashing. In this case, urgent service of the
electric parking brake system is required. Do not rely on
the parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Safehold Brake Service Mode
Safehold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
System that will engage the park brake automatically if authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmis- which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
sion is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no service.
attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal,
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the you or your technician push the rear piston into the rear
vehicle from rolling. caliper bore. With the electric parking brake system, this
Safehold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the can only be done after retracting the Electric Parking
Electric Park Brake Switch to the release position while Brake actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be
the driver door is open. Once manually bypassed, Safe- done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through
hold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches EVIC (Electronic Vehicle Information Center), Driver
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF Information Display (DID) or the Uconnect® Settings in
position and back to ON again. your vehicle. This menu based system will guide you
through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in
order to perform rear brake service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
WARNING!
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill. You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
• The parking brake must be unapplied. you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
• The transmission must be in Park or Neutral. you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
While in service mode, the Electric Parking Brake fault chanic.
lamp will flash continuously while the ignition switch is
ON. BRAKE SYSTEM 5
When brake service work is complete, the following steps Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal operation: normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force. during application, greater pedal force required to slow
• Apply the Electric Parking Brake Switch. or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light.”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to vehicle stability and brake performance under most
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
with the power system operating. computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM wheel lock-up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic WARNING!

brake control system. This system includes Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction • Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
Control System (TCS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
(ESC). These systems work together to enhance both press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi- slow down or stop.
tions. Your vehicle is also equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB) and Rain Brake Support (RBS) (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys- portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase service is required. However, the conventional brake
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or Warning Light” is not on.
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition 5
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous switch is cycled to the ON position, have the bulb
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or repaired as soon as possible.
the safety of others. If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the Anti-Lock Brake
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors (ABS) and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come Systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS
on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON system is required. See your authorized dealer.
position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related of the stop.
motor noises. These noises are the system performing its These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working
properly. This self check occurs each time the vehicle is
WARNING!
started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
stopping conditions. ABS inducing conditions can in- electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose interference caused by improperly installed or high
debris, or panic stops. output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
You also may experience the following when the brake capability. Installation of such equipment should be
system goes into anti-lock: performed by qualified professionals.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop). All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves. accurate signals for the computer.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Traction Control System (TCS) Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning evasive driving maneuvers. 5
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode.
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
section of this manual.
other vehicles.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
WARNING!
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi- benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects deactivated.
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck- WARNING!
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
Brake Assist System (BAS) braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking traction afforded.
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens- resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the (Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must the oversteer or understeer condition.
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
the safety of others. appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor- WARNING! 5
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter- Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to deter- road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and com- cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
pares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Partial Off
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, Off” switch (located in the lower switch bank above the
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa- heater/air conditioning controls) or by shifting to “S” (if
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be equipped). When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in the
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indi-
others. cator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability fea-
tures of ESC function normally, with the exception of
ESC Operating Modes engine power reduction. This mode is intended to be
used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
The ESC system has two available operating modes:
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor-
Full On mally allow is required to gain traction.
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode. switch or by shifting out of “S” (if equipped). This will
This mode should be used for almost all driving situa- restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
tions. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Par-
tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
5
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
ESC Off Switch gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
operation. mode is overcome, turn ESC on again by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Hill Start Assist (HSA) • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The WARNING!
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
the intended direction of travel. vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
HSA Activation Criteria could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
activate: ing the vehicle.
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
HSA Off Rain Brake Support
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
the Uconnect® settings. Refer to ⬙Uconnect® Settings⬙ in in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
⬙Understanding Your Instrument Panel⬙ for further infor- amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
mation. on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
Ready Alert Braking
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
reach full braking during emergency braking situations. no driver interaction is required.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may 5
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
ESC OFF Indicator Light
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes. when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this NOTE:
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is cycled ON.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected. • Each time the ignition is cycled ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was cycled off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/ that caused the ESC activation.
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:
Tire Markings • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire 5
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
Code (TIN) ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
5
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
5
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
Pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu- 5
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [295 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never cause collisions.
overload them. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
are affected by improper tire pressure: loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
• Safety and Vehicle Stability lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Economy
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle Under-inflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the resulting in higher fuel consumption.
right or left. Tread Wear
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering. 5
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE: Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Inflation Pressures Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
At least once a month: mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires wall.
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
inflated. of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION! 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- the winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
WARNING!
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition. High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
Radial Ply Tires 5
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very WARNING!
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. combine them with other types of tires.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Repair Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
• The tire has not been driven on when flat. summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information. Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a au-
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the “all
season” designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may Snow Tires
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
WARNING! “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You If you need snow tires, select tires
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury equivalent in size and type to the origi-
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
the possibility of loss of vehicle control. only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and 5
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be mation.
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
Spare Tires — If Equipped
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation CAUTION!
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi- Damage to the vehicle may result.
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
Wheel — If Equipped ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
tire rotation pattern.
WARNING! 5
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare only. With these spares, do not drive more than
by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Full Size Spare — If Equipped your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn WARNING!
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity. inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the of vehicle control.
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING! 5
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Distance driven
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
becomes 1/16” (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
mation.
Life Of Tire WARNING!
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
factors including, but not limited to: years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
• Driving style follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures in serious injury or death.
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace- exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
ment. with oil, grease, and gasoline.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Replacement Tires It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
those of the original wheels.
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. 5
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus- failure and loss of vehicle control.
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and CAUTION!
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen- Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
sion components. You could lose control and have may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use ings.
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
capacity, other than what was originally equipped clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load against damage:
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
You could lose control and have a collision.
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Install on front tires only.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• For a 215/55R17 tire on a 17 x 7.0J x 41mm wheel, use • Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
of a snow traction device with a maximum projection tween tires and other suspension components, it is
of 9 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended. important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
WARNING! damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re- 5
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
CAUTION! • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
following precautions: • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc- aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tions on the method of installation, operating tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
suggested operating speed of the device manufac- smooth, quiet ride.
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
unequal rates. does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire 5
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
Tire Rotation three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
sure. above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn tion.
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
CAUTION!
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated • The TPMS has been optimized for the original
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
value. warning have been established for the tire size
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) eration or sensor damage may result when using
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may 5
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin-
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve ability.
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
NOTE: correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
ing Telltale Light.”
failure or condition.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
while adjusting your tire pressure.
the tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Base System Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
readings to the receiver module. cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and
a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
and to maintain the proper pressure.
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire 5
The TPMS consists of the following components: to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
• Receiver Module
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale Light” will turn off.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order TPMS sensors.
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
that affects radio wave signals.
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information. 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
Service TPMS Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The 1. The matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault monitored by the TPMS.
can occur due to any of the following:
2. If you install the matching full-size spare in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on upon the next PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on
ignition cycle. upon the next ignition cycle.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
(24 km/h) will turn off the “TPMS Telltale Light,” as 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
Size Spare 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 5
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update
the spare tire. automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Premium System — If Equipped The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
readings to the receiver module. illuminate or the chime to sound when it is stored in the
spare tire location. However, it will cause a “SPARE LOW
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the PRESSURE” message to display in the DID.
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
• Receiver Module illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
four active road tires. In addition, the Driver Information
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, Display (DID) will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). the low tire pressure values in a different color.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
DID will return to their original color, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 5
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the DID will display a
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning ⬙SERVICE SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s received.
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro-
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
viding the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE SYSTEM
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicles With Full-Size Spare 4. The DID will display a graphic showing the tire
pressure value in the same color as the other pressure
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
values in place of the different color low tire pressure
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be
value. The DID will also display a “SPARE LOW
monitored by the TPMS.
PRESSURE” message to remind you to service the flat
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire tire.
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
Vehicles With Compact Spare
limit, a chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will turn on upon the next ignition cycle. In 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
addition, the DID will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni- 5
message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
value in a different color.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
15 mph (24 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn ing limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the “TPMS
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low- Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound.
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display a
tires. different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
solid. In addition, the DID will display a “SERVICE TPMS to receive this information.
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
General Information
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off following conditions:
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
will display a “SERVICE SYSTEM” message for five • This device may not cause harmful interference.
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the • This device must accept any interference received,
pressure value. including interference that may cause undesired op-
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and eration.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the following licenses:
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of United States KR55WY9012
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the Canada 7812D-5WY9012
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
FUEL REQUIREMENTS Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
All engines are designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
fuel economy and performance when us-
mends the use of gasoline that meet the WWFC specifi-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
cations if they are available.
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not Reformulated Gasoline
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
engines.
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner 5
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is prove air quality.
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
before considering service for the vehicle. fuel system components.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
may be used in your vehicle. ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION! If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso- fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these • Operate in a lean mode.
blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or • Poor engine performance.
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a • Poor cold start and cold drivability.
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol. • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with life and reduces emissions system performance in some
E-85 perform the following: vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• Change the engine oil and oil filter. therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
and California reformulated gasoline.
engine controller memory.
Materials Added To Fuel
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel. All gasoline sold in the United States is required to 5
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT In Gasoline
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) conditions and they would result in additional cost.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline fuel.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! • The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s Most of these products contain high concentrations
performance: of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. mance problems resulting from the use of such
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor- fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
mance and damage the emissions control system. manufacturer.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune you.
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
monoxide poisoning: with all side windows fully open.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
E-85 General Information 5
engine running for an extended period. If the The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
running for more than a short period, adjust the fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
the vehicle. subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
(Continued) features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
E-85 Fuel Cap E-85 Badge
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Ethanol Fuel (E-85) For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
mended.
15% unleaded gasoline.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
WARNING! • You do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could refueling.
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok- • You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov- least 5 miles (8 km).
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the 5
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
use it near an open flame. starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
hard starting and rough idle following start up even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully Starting
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
Techron may be used. a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles until the engine is fully warmed up.
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu- beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Cruising Range
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395 than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
contains additional requirements, developed during ex- consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to (mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR® or an by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Replacement Parts ADDING FUEL
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are The fuel filler cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure the passenger side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com- lost or damaged, be sure the replacement fuel filler cap
patible parts. has been designed for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle. 5
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the • Damage to the fuel system or emission control
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is system could result from using an improper fuel
being filled. cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impu-
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is rities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
in violation of most state and federal fire regula- aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indi-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on. cator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a escaping from the system.
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You • A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
could be burned. Always place gas containers on on.
the ground while filling. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
1. Put the vehicle in park and switch the ignition off.

2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door (9
o’clock position) and release to open.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel
filler nozzle and replace the fuel filler cap.
5. To close the fuel filler door, press the center-rear edge
(9 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and then
release. The fuel filler door will latch closed.
NOTE:
• In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the 5
ice build up.
Fuel Filler Door and Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
1 — Fuel Filler Door Actuator is full.
2 — Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook
• Tighten the fuel filler cap about one quarter turn until
you hear one click. This is an indication that the fuel
3. Remove the fuel filler cap and hang fuel filler cap by filler cap is properly tightened.
tether on fuel fill door to prevent damage to body side.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL VEHICLE LOADING
will come on. Be sure the fuel filler cap is tightened
Certification Label
every time the vehicle is refueled.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a bottom of the label is your VIN.
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
further information. including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Payload Rim Size
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the listed.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Inflation Pressure
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
Curb Weight
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight 5
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR. scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Loading Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
the brakes operate.
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
CAUTION!
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh- way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is your vehicle.
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the TRAILER TOWING
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
MOTORHOME, ETC.) the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 5. Release the parking brake.
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain • DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
will result. drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
Recreational towing for front-wheel drive models is ground. 5
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the transmission in
PARK.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer
unit.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .549 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .549 ▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 6
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .552
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .554
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .554
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .557
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .584 ▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .586
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . .585
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank below the radio screen. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C 6
other motorists. system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
may wear down your battery. engine cooling system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops properly calibrated torque wrench.
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for Torque Specifications
service.
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/
Bolt Size Bolt
WARNING! Socket
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine Size
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If 100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Service Kit Storage
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under an access cover in
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, the trunk.
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may 1. Open the trunk.
result in personal injury. 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED

Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Pull Strap
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Remove the fastener securing the Tire Service Kit. 4. Remove Tire Service Kit.
6
Tire Service Kit Fastener Tire Service Kit
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob

2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on
bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air 6
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
tire application use and need to be replaced after each avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
use. Always replace these components immediately at Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼”
your original equipment vehicle dealer. (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the heat source.
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
the Tire Service Kit. collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
under the following circumstances: the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
1/4” (6 mm) or larger. you, your passengers, and others around you.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage. • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
– If the tire has any damage from driving with Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
extremely low tire pressure. Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,
tire. and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
– If the wheel has any damage. plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
the wheel. is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy- necessary to place the valve stem in this position
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of before proceeding.
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the igni-
immediately. tion.
4. Set the parking brake.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: 6
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Sealant Mode position.
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat deflated tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire.
valve stem. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
nails) from the tire. stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Deflated Tire: Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. use. Call for assistance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air pressure within 15 minutes:
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6):
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). mended inflation pressure before continuing.
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service 6
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Kit.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi- 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
WARNING!
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
CAUTION! Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. follow this warning can result in injuries that are
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con- around you.
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal (E) After Driving:
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
permanent damage to the kit.
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
(D) Drive Vehicle: 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Mode position.
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure 2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
stem. Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
Gauge (3). the vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
service center.
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
6
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire ment.”
and loading information label on the driver-side door
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
opening.
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla- using the Tire Service Kit.
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
vehicle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
of it accordingly.
WARNING!
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing. • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the (Continued)
bottle is locked into place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body the jack, wheel chocks and spare tire.
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get 1. Open the trunk.
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift. 2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to 6
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Pull Strap Jack And Spare Tire Fastener

3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire. 4. Remove the scissors jack, wheel bolt wrench and
wheel chocks from the spare wheel as an assembly.
Remove the chocks from the jack assembly. Turn the
jack screw to the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench,
and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- or changing the wheel.
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
repaired or replaced immediately. 3. Set the parking brake.
Preparations For Jacking 4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the 5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position. 6
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery 6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
areas. opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place
both chocks under the tire.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
help prevent personal injury or damage to your you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
vehicle: service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
vehicle. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. careful of motor traffic.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
be raised. securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic valve stem facing the ground.
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle. 6
Jacking Locations
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is
closest to the flat tire.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack

2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench Front Body Flange
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Rear Body Flange Front Body Flange Engaged
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Rear Body Flange Engaged Front Jacking Location

5. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the
jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, center-
ing the jack saddle between the locating notches on the
sill flange.
6. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
7. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.

8. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
6
Rear Jacking Location Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
9. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
WARNING!
handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for proper repaired or replaced immediately.
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tight- Road Tire Installation
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service station. Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
12. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 6
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem- 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Securely stow wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel
the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire. Release the which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the
parking brake before driving the vehicle. wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel handle counterclockwise.
3 — Wheel bolt
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug
WARNING!
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
authorized dealer or service station. do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
7. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem- result in personal injury.
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
assembly using the means provided. Release the park-
handle counterclockwise.
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
8. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until 6
properly seated against the wheel.
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
Road Tire Installation “Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded authorized dealer or service station.
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
CAUTION!
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
assembly using the means provided. Release the park- other booster source with a system voltage greater
ing brake before driving the vehicle. than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque alternator or electrical system may occur.
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel. WARNING!
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Preparations For Jump-Start
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or 6
1 — Positive Battery Post sparks away from the battery.
2 — Negative Battery Post
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
CAUTION!
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
WARNING! or the discharged vehicle.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this Connecting The Jumper Cables
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result. 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
Jump-Starting Procedure 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WARNING!
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could negative (-) post of the booster battery.
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
WARNING!
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
not use any other exposed metal parts. cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
you should have the battery and charging system in-
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
spected at your authorized dealer.
battery. 6
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables CAUTION!
in the reverse sequence:
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis- plugged in long enough without engine operation,
charged battery.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to wheels or racing the engine.
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting. NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE CAUTION!
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be- explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
damage may result. ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels MANUAL PARK RELEASE
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring). WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the 6
WARNING! parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener- allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
(Continued)
death for those in or around the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmis- 2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
sion will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), Manual Park Release access cover, which is under-
a Manual Park Release is available. neath the rubber storage bin liner in the center console
pass-through.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Manual Park Release Cover

3. Unsnap the tether from the Manual Park Release lever,
Manual Park Release location and use it to pull the lever upwards.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6
Manual Park Release Tether Locked Position
4. Pull the tether to rotate the lever up and rearward, 5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
until it locks vertically in place. Verify that the Manual Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
Park Release lever is locked in the released position. securely connected to a tow vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To reset the Manual Park Release: TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
1. Pull the tether upwards to unlock the lever. This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down to its original position.
3. Re-install the access cover and the rubber storage bin
liner.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- vehicles under tow must be observed.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
position, not the ACC position. towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
wheels raised).
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
CAUTION!
for towing. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
CAUTION! age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur. Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
6
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
towing. If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. wheels raised).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require- • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam- damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
age from improper towing is not covered under the will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models quirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from im-
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
proper towing is not covered under the New Ve-
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
hicle Limited Warranty.
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .589 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .590 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .591 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .591 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
7
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 ▫ Front Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From ▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Backup Lamps (Passenger Side) . . . . . . . . . . .646
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Backup Lamps (Driver Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
▫ Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . .626
▫ Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps . . . . .639 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
▫ Front Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Oil Fill Cap 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Engine Oil Filter Access Cover 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emission control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a 7
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as “CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
soon as possible. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
further information. ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
PROGRAMS you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not start this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing. position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen: ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station. REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
7
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
may then indicate that the system is now ready. operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself. services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you. “Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a CAUTION!
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If form repairs and service when necessary could
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me- components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
chanic.
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids fully warmed up engine is shut off.
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter- Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo- improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine, maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is dipstick. Adding 1 quart (0.9 L) of oil when the reading is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc- the top of the safe zone on these engines.
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure. CAUTION!
Engine Oil Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause

aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage 7
Checking Oil Level your engine.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Change Engine Oil American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa- This symbol means that the oil has
tion. been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
manufacturer only recommends
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
API Certified engine oils.
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
CAUTION!
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem-
partment” illustration in this section.
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
grade for your engine. Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- Synthetic Engine Oils
ber should not be used.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes 7
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell are followed.
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating Materials Added To Engine Oil
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its Engine Oil Filter Selection
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
filters and are recommended.
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and Engine Air Cleaner Filter
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
your area. maintenance intervals.
Engine Oil Filter
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
at every engine oil change.
NOTE: For best access to the oil filter, a drive on hoist
should be used instead of a chassis hoist.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine tenance required.
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary WARNING!
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
serious personal injury. over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In 7
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be Emergencies” for further information.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom- (Continued)
mended.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep • It is essential when replacing the cables on the
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use battery that the positive cable is attached to the
a booster battery or any other booster source with positive post and the negative cable is attached to
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
clamps to touch each other. (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands terminal posts and free of corrosion.
after handling. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
at the start of each warm season. This service should injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this should be done by an experienced technician.
time.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 7
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
Equipped vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
A/C Air Filter
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
WARNING!
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf —
If Equipped The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on
the lower right of center console. Perform the following
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
procedure to replace the filter:
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen-
tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product 1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover.
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Console Closeout Panel Hush Panel

3. Pull down the passenger hush panel under the dash 4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the 7
panel top of the door to release the cover then rotate the door
out and lift up.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Air Filter Cover Location A/C Air Filter

5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of 6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indica- indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
tors.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
CAUTION!
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
to properly install the filter will result in the need to components to ensure proper function. When performing
replace it more often. other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
panel and console closeout.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
maintenance intervals. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the 7
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, tions of salt or road film.
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt residual water.
from a dry windshield. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend- in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
performance of blades may be present with chattering, rating information can be found on most washer fluid
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions containers.
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary. WARNING!
Adding Washer Fluid Commercially available windshield washer solvents
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the must be exercised when filling or working around
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with the washer solution.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Exhaust System
WARNING!
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
system. carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex- information.
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam- • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams over materials that can burn. Such materials might
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con- 7
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. tact anything that can burn.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
CAUTION!
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un- portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control damage.
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor- NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
mance and cause serious damage to the engine. systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your against you.
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
resulting in possible damage to the converter and tions, should be obtained immediately.
vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
motion.
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
vehicle.
Engine Coolant Checks
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
Cooling System fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser 7
WARNING! for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If down the face of the condenser.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
entire system for leaks.
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but needed to be added to the system please contact your
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for local authorized dealer.
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti- OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-12106).
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
damage and may decrease corrosion protection. be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- may plug the radiator.
ant is different and should not be mixed with • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat- Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine tifreeze) is not recommended.
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling Adding Coolant
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine 7
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
authorized dealer as soon as possible. allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
(Continued) miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform- (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle. will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Material Standard MS-12106. properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- needed to be added to the system please contact your
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen- local authorized dealer.
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated. mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion- HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT
coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant gine damage may result.
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
WARNING! with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek 7
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding spills immediately.
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Coolant Level Points To Remember
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
indicated on the bottle. humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
a month.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS- expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not ing.
overfill.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are Brake System
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
for leaks. system components should be inspected periodically.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) maintenance intervals.
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components. WARNING!
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
hoses are not kinked or obstructed. possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
condenser clean. possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency. 7
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install Brake Master Cylinder
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis- performing under hood services or immediately if the
sions. “Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
WARNING!
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
should be checked when pads are replaced. However, information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup can severely damage your brake system and/or
may be needed. impair its performance. The proper type of brake
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re- fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main- original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
taining Your Vehicle” for further information. reservoir.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake This could result in a collision.
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may Automatic Transmission
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro- Selection Of Lubricant
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision. It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
7
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
CAUTION!
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
CAUTION! the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter Fluid Level Check
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Special Additives Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
check your transmission fluid level using special service
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the ve-
tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use
of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission damage.
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
CAUTION!
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam- Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
Fluid And Filter Changes corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
life of the vehicle. hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How- body protection.
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes 7
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is The following maintenance recommendations will enable
disassembled for any reason. you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
What Causes Corrosion? • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
The most common causes are:
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Stone and gravel impact. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
• Insects, tree sap and tar. that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. CAUTION!
Washing • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve- such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild scratch metal and painted surfaces.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
clear water. can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Special Care • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once packaged and sealed.
a month. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open. possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, match the color of your vehicle.
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. 7
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
the owner. MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives Equipped
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New ner:
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
this is all that is required to maintain this finish. with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
CAUTION!
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions • For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro- Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
equivalent is recommended. • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior Care Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
Instrument Panel Cover
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface, and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
use protectants or other products, which may cause and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any
restore the low glare surface. liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
Cleaning Interior Trim
leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is
Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MOPAR® not required to maintain the original condition.
Total Clean or equivalent, and if necessary, follow with
MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent. Do not WARNING!
use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total 7
Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
Cleaning Leather Upholstery closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Cleaning Headlights cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
age than glass headlights.
scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and directly on the mirror.
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing. The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
Glass Surfaces
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial rag.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. bing, etc.).
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to FUSES
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly. • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
WARNING! rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
7
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do age.
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
is off and that all the other services are switched off compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
and/or disengaged. tridge fuses, mini-fuses and relays. A label that identifies
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho- each component is printed on the inside of the cover.
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Cavity Blade Fuse Cartridge Fuse Description

F06 – – Not Used
F08 25 Amp Clear – Engine Control Module (ECM) / Fuel Inj.
F10 20 Amp Yellow – Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
F12 20 Amp Yellow – Brake Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
F13 10 Amp Red – Engine Control Module (ECM) / VSM (Stop/
Start Only)
F14 10 Amp Red – Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) / Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped / RDM / 7
Brake System Module (BSM) / Brake Pedal S.
F16 20 Amp Yellow – Powertrain / Ignition Coil
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

F19 – 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
F20 10 Amp Red – A/C Compressor Clutch
F22 5 Amp Tan – Radiator Fan Enable
F23 70 Amp Tan – Body Controller Module (BCM) – Feed 2
F23 50 Amp Red – Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #2 – If
Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
F25B 20 Amp Yellow – Front Washer Pump – If Equipped with Stop/
Start Option
F28 15 Amp Blue – Transmission Control Module (TCM)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

F30 10 Amp Red – Engine Control Module (ECM) / EPS
F37 – 50 Amp Red Radiator Fan PWM Controller
F39 – 40 Amp Green HVAC Blower Motor
7
F41 – 50 Amp Red Voltage Stability Module (VSM) #1 – If
Equipped With Stop/Start Engine Option
F41 — 60 Amp Yellow Body Controller Module (BCM) – Feed 1
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

F43 20 Amp Yellow – Fuel Pump Motor
F45 – 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module (PDM) – If Equipped
F46 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof – If Equipped
F48 – 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module (DDM)
F49 – 30 Amp Pink Power Inverter (115V A/C) – If Equipped
F50 – 30 Amp Pink Windshield Wiper Smart Motor (WWSM)
F53 – 30 Amp Pink Brake System Module BSM & Valves
F54 – 30 Amp Pink Body Controller Module (BCM) – Feed 3
F55 10 Amp Red – Blind Spot Sensors/Compass/Rearview
Camera – If Equipped
F56 15 Amp Blue – Ignition Node Module (IGNM) / RF Hub
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

F58 10 Amp Red – Occupant Classification Module/Voltage Sta-
bility Module (VSM) #2 – If Equipped With
Stop/Start Engine Option
F59 – 30 Amp Pink Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)
F60 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet – Center Console
F63 20 Amp Yellow – Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F64 20 Amp Yellow – Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped
F65 10 Amp Red – In Car Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor/ 7
Driver Assist System Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If Equipped With Stop/Start
Engine Option
F66 15 Amp Blue – Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Electronic Cli-
mate Control (ECC)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

F67 10 Amp Red – In Car Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Drivers Assist System Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If Equipped
F69 10 Amp Red – Gear Shift Module (GSM)/Active Grill Shutter
(AGS). – If Equipped / EPB SW
F70 5 Amp Tan – Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) – If Equipped
with Stop/Start Option
F71 20 Amp Yellow – HID Headlamp Right – If Equipped with
Stop/Start Option
F72 10 Amp Red – Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
F74 – 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster/Defogger
F75 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter
F76 10 Amp Red – Drivers Window SW– If Equipped
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

F77 10 Amp Red – UCI Port/Brake Pedal Switch
F78 10 Amp Red – Diagnostic Port/Steering Column Control
Module (SCCM)
F79 10 Amp Red – Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Switch Bank/
Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/EPB SW
F80 20 Amp Yellow – Radio
F83 – 20 Amp Blue Engine Control Module (ECM)
F84 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Left
F85 – – Not Used 7
F86 20 Amp Yellow – Horns – If Equipped With Stop/Start Engine
Option
F87A 20 Amp Yellow – HID Headlamp Left – If Equipped Stop/Start
Only
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

F88 10 Amp Red – Collision Mitigation Module (CMM)/
Electrochromatic Mirror/Haptic Lane Feed-
back Module (Half)/Humidity Sensor– If
Equipped
F93 – 40 Amp Green Brake System Module (BSM) – Pump Motor –
If Equipped
F94 – 30 Amp Pink Electric Park Brake (EPB) – Right
F95 10 Amp Red – Electrochromatic Mirror/Rain/Pass. Window
SW/Power Outlet Console Illumination/
Sensor/Sunroof – If Equipped
F96 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
F97 10 Amp Red – Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

F98 25 Amp Clear – Audio Amplifier – If Equipped
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger com-
partment on the left side dash panel under the instru-
ment panel.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description

F13 15 Amp Blue Low Beam Left
F32 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting 7
F36 10 Amp Red Intrusion Module / Siren
F37 7.5 Amp Brown Aux. Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
F38 20 Amp Yellow All Doors Lock/Unlock
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Cavity Blade Fuse Description

F48 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F49 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Support
F51 10 Amp Red Driver Window Switch / Power Mirrors – If
Equipped
F53 7.5 Amp Brown UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F89 5 Amp Tan Trunk Lamp
F91 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Left
F92 5 Amp Tan Fog Lamp Front Right
F93 10 Amp Red Low Beam Right
VEHICLE STORAGE • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery. conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
You may: fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. of compressor damage when the system is started again.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp 578/W5W
Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp 578/W5W
Visor Vanity Lamp A6220
Glove Box Lamp A6220
Shift Indicator Lamp IKLE14140
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 579
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement.
7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp HID (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Bi-Halogen Headlamp HIR2
Daytime Running Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24W SV
Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp H11
LED Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21W
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp 921
License Lamp W5W
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
WARNING!
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID) ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
Headlamps — If Equipped cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge dealer for service.
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should 7
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source 1. Rotate the screw on the headlamp access door in the
yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your wheel liner to access headlamp assembly.
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Access Door Headlamp Bulb Cap

2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the 4. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and
headlamp bulb cap. rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Headlamp Bulb Socket Headlamp Bulb

5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
CAUTION!
7
then connect the replacement bulb.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp hous-
ing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Lock headlamp access door in wheel liner.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the lamp assembly Beauty Cover
on the passenger side of the vehicle.
3. Remove the brace by removing the four fasteners and
2. Remove the beauty cover, by removing the 10 push loosening the 5th inboard fastener.
pins.
4. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7. Install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.
8. Install brace, brace bolts and tighten as shown.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket

5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace- 7
ment bulb.
Brace Bolt Tightening Sequence
6. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into 9. Install beauty cover.
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp
socket clockwise to lock it in place.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner
and carefully peel back liner for access.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal

3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners 4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly
2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.
rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the 5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the
lamp assembly. three fasteners.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Fog Lamp 3. Rotate the front fog lamp socket counterclockwise,
and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the
1. Remove the three fasteners from the lower closeout,
front fog lamp housing.
and peel down the lower closeout.
7
Front Fog Lamp Socket
Lower Closeout
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replace-
2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.
ment bulb.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Backup Lamps (Passenger Side)
CAUTION!
1. Open trunk lid.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the 2. Remove the passenger side access cover.
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
3. Remove the inner trunk lid handle cover.
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Remove the two screws and remove the inner trunk
5. Install the front fog lamp socket assembly into the into lid handle.
the front fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector
clockwise to lock it in place. NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
trim push pins to gain access.
6. Position the lower closeout panel in place and secure
with the three fasteners. 5. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Inner Deck Panel Backup Lamp Socket

6. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4 7. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the 7
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk replacement bulb.
lid lamp housing.
8. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock
it into place.
10. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a
push pin if removed.
11. Install access cover.
Backup Lamps (Driver Side)
1. Open trunk lid.
2. Remove the drivers side access cover.
3. Remove inner deck lid support push pin.
Backup Lamp Socket
NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
trim push pins to gain access. 5. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk
4. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk lid lamp housing.
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
NOTE: passenger side shown the drivers side is similar. replacement bulb.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.
8. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock
it into place.
9. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a
push pin if removed.
10. Install the access cover.
Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the tail lamp housing beauty cover by grasp- Tail Lamp Beauty Cover
ing the top edge and pulling rearward to expose the 3. Remove the tail lamp housing bolts 7
tail lamp housing bolts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5. Rotate the stop/rear turn signal lamp socket 1/4 turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
7. Install the bulb socket into the tail lamp housing and
rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Install the tail lamp housing.
9. Install the tail lamp housing beauty cover.
Tail Lamp Bolts License Plate Lamp

4. Pull the tail lamp housing directly rearward to dis- 1. Remove the screw of the license plate lamp assembly
lodge the two out bored ball studs from the socket and pull down on the license plate lamp assembly to
fasteners. remove.
NOTE: It may be necessary to use significant force to 2. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
remove the two out bored ball studs from the socket replacement bulb.
fasteners to remove the tail lamp housing. 3. Install the license plate lamp assembly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.6L Engines 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/ 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula) 7
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/ 8.7 Quarts 8.2 Liters
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma-
terial Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma-
terial Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87-89 Octane
7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
damage and may decrease corrosion protection. be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool- may plug the radiator.
ant is different and should not be mixed with • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en- propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat- Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine tifreeze) is not recommended.
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Chassis

Automatic Transmission Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic
Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES I
N
T
E
CONTENTS N
A
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660 N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
M 658 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
N message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
T Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
E indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
N than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
A referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Reset”
N scheduled maintenance.
in “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
C
E Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change ⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser- Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
S vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
C
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
H vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
E cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
D Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operat- whichever comes first.
U
L ing Conditions can cause the change oil message to Severe Duty All Models
E illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
S reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
8 within the next 500 miles (805 km). is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 659 M
A
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil I
Change Indicator System: N
• Check engine oil level. T
• Change oil and filter E
• Check windshield washer fluid level. N
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu- A
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator N
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, system turns on. C
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns E
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
on. required S
C
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses H
brake master cylinder, fill as needed. and park brake E
D
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights. • Inspect engine cooling system protection and U
hoses L
Required Maintenance Intervals. E
• Inspect exhaust system S
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or 8
page for the required maintenance intervals. off-road conditions
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
E
N Mileage:
A
N
C Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
E 112,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
S
C
H Additional Inspections
E
D Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
U Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, X X X X X X X
L and replace if necessary.
E Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
S
8 Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs – 2.4L Engine ** X
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 661 M
A
I
100,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
110,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage: N
T
E
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 N
A
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
112,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000 N
Or Kilometers: C
E
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine ** X S
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years C
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes X X H
first. E
D
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X U
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, L
E
yearly intervals do not apply. S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
A
I WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
N motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
A have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
C you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
E service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
S
C • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
H hicle could result in a component malfunction and
E effect vehicle handling and performance. This
D
U could cause an accident.
L
E
S
8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .665 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .666 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .669
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .666 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .670 9
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
664 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 665
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests
YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
Prepare For The Appointment vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality 9
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance. Phone: (800) 247–9753
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In Mexico Contact: Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
Mexico, D. F. a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Impaired (TDD/TTY) Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter have any questions about the service contract, call the
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY. Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 9
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
WARNING!
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser- some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contract documents, and contact the person listed in contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
those documents. nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
We appreciate that you have made a major investment State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer or other reproductive harm.
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with WARRANTY INFORMATION
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
concerns. LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
MOPAR® PARTS To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
424–9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
operating at its best.
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could causeIf you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in roadsafety/
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in 9
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas- charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac- make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
for an order form. features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes). ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Call toll free at: Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada) conditions on a specified government test course. For
Or example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
• www.techauthority.com actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
TIRE QUALITY GRADES teristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle. wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- 9
requirements in addition to these grades. mance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
WARNING!
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on wheel, than the minimum required by law.
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or WARNING!
peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
Temperature Grades a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat heat buildup and possible tire failure.
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
674 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .84
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Occupant Classification Module (OCM) . . . . . . . .66
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .182 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .611 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Air Bag Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .598
Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Front Passenger Knee Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Lighter Weight Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 675
Alarm Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .419
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
676 INDEX
Caps, Filler
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .592
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 677
Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .101 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . .100 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .613
Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .94 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .89 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Cleaning Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
678 INDEX
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Door Locks
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .34
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Driver Information Display (DID)
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Dipsticks Driver Information Display (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Disposal Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 679
Driving EVIC Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Emergency, In Case of
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .592
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .178 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .274 Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .333 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
EVIC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
680 INDEX
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Fabric Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589 Filters
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Flashers
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 681
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Fluid Level Checks Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .652 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Front Position Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
682 INDEX
Gauges High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .166
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Hazard Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .472 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .166
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .549 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Headlights Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Ignition
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 683
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Front Courtesy Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter . . . . . . .21 Key Fob
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .172 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
684 INDEX
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . ..24 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
. . . . . .
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.36 . Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
. . . . .
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . ..36. Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
. . . . .
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..36. Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
. . . . .
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . ..23. Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
. . . . .
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . ..23. Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
. . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..22. Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
. . . . .
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.12 . Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
. . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.12 . Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
. . . . .
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .491
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Light Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 685
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .329 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .169 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639 Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .329 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .329
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
686 INDEX
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 687
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .500
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597 Power
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .299
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .613
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
688 INDEX
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .398
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545 Remote Starting
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602 EVIC Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Control Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 689
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .60
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .59
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Seat Belt Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .55
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .55 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .58 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
BeltAlert® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
690 INDEX
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 SENTRY KEY®
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Shifting
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 691
Specifications Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .61
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Steering Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .419
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .398 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .499
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
692 INDEX
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .493
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .494
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .509
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .563
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Spinning . . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .513
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Tread Wear Indicators ......... . . . . . . . . . . .513
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Tire Safety Information . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .493
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504 Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .552
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 To Open Hood . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .157
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .544
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Disabled Vehicle . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .584
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Recreational . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .545
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .545
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .471
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .544
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671 Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .457
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 Automatic . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .457
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 Autostick . . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .468
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 Operation . . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . . . . . . . .457
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 693
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .281 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .25 Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Uconnect® Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
694 INDEX
Water Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621 Window Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Driver/Passenger Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . .41 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Express Up And Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Rear Passenger Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2015 200
2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
200
Chrysler Group LLC
15UF-126-AC Third Edition Rev 1
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: Printed in U.S.A.

Chrysler Group LLC: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chrysler Group LLC: Owner'S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2015 200

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Stamped VIN Location

3. If any doors are open, close them.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

Emergency Key Removal Separating The RKE Transmitter Case

Manual Door Lock Switch

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door

Power Window Controls

Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,

Trunk Emergency Release

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

Front Passenger Seat Oc- Front Passenger Air WARNING!

Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind each

Tether Strap Anchorages

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF

Stationary Objects Opposing Traffic

Rear Cross Path

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Power Lumbar Switch Front Seat Adjustment

Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment

• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to

Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats

Rear Seat Release Loops

Hood Release Lever

Safety Latch Lever Location Safety Latch Lever

Fog Light Switch

Press the lens once to turn the light on.

Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield Wiper Operation

Intermittent Wiper Operation

Windshield Washer Operation

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adap-

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest) Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)

Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium) Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)

Turn Or Bend Example ACC Hill Example

Lane Changing Example

Narrow Vehicle Example

Lane Sense On Message

System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)

Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow

Slow Tone/Solid Arc Slow Tone/Solid Arc